Samsung SC-D263-XAA User Manual

Download

ENGLISH

Digital Video Camcorder

SC-D263/D362/D363/

D364/D365/D366

AF Auto Focus CCD Charge Coupled Device LCD Liquid Crystal Display

RoHS compliant

Our product complies with “The Restriction Of the use of certain Hazardous

electronic equipment”, and we do not use the 6 hazardous materials- Cadmium(Cd), Lead (Pb), Mercury (Hg), Hexavalent Chromium (Cr Biphenyls (PBBs), Poly Brominated Diphenyl Ethers(PBDEs)- in our products.

Owner’s Instruction Book

Before operating the unit, please read this Instruction Book thoroughly, and retain it for future reference.

Use only approved battery packs. Otherwise, there is a danger of overheating, fire or explosion. Samsung is not responsible for problems occurring due to using unapproved batteries.

Substances in electrical and

), Poly Brominated

SC-D263/D362/D363/

D364/D365/D366

AF CCD LCD

符符合合

我們的産品符合「在電子與電氣設備中使用有害化學物質之管制條例」標準，産

害化學物質：蘭 (Cd)/ 鉛 (Pb)/ 水銀

(Hg)/ 六價芩 (Cr

(PBBs)/ 以及多摺聯蓬墨類 (PBDEs)0

品中絶對不含下列 6 種有

標標準準

RoHS

)/ 多摺聯蓬類

AD68-00970F

ENGLISH

Contents

Notes and Safety Instructions ...............................................5

Getting to Know Your Camcorder ........................................7

Features............................................................................................................................................... 7

Accessories Supplied with Camcorder.............................................................................................. 8

Front & Left View.................................................................................................................................9

Left Side View ...................................................................................................................................10

Right & Top View............................................................................................................................... 11

Rear & Bottom View .........................................................................................................................12

Remote Control (SC-D364/D366 only)............................................................................................13

Preparation..........................................................................14

Using the Hand Strap & Lens Cover.............................................................................................. .14

Lithium Battery Installation ...............................................................................................................15

Using the Lithium Ion Battery Pack .................................................................................................16

Connecting a Power Source ............................................................................................................19

About the Operating Modes .............................................................................................................19

Using the QUICK MENU.................................................................................................................. 20

OSD (On Screen Display) in Camera/Player Modes ....................................................................21

OSD (On Screen Display) in M.Cam/M.Player Modes (SC-D363/D364/D365/D366 only).........22

Turning the OSD (On Screen Display) On/Off ...............................................................................22

Initial Setting : System Menu Setting ..................................23

Setting the Clock (Clock Set) ..........................................................................................................23

Setting the Wireless Remote Control Acceptance (Remote) (SC-D364/D366 only)...................24

Setting the Beep Sound (Beep Sound) .........................................................................................25

Setting the Shutter Sound (Shutter Sound) (SC-D363/D364/D365/D366 only)......................... 26

Selecting the OSD Language (Language).....................................................................................27

Viewing the Demonstration (Demonstration) ................................................................................28

Initial Setting : Display Menu Setting..................................29

Adjusting the LCD Screen (LCD Bright/ LCD Color) ...................................................................29

Displaying the Date/Time (Date/Time)............................................................................................30

Setting the TV Display (TV Display) ...............................................................................................31

Basic Recording...................................................................32

Using the Viewfinder......................................................................................................................... 32

Inserting / Ejecting a Cassette .........................................................................................................32

Various Recording Techniques.........................................................................................................33

Making your First Recording ............................................................................................................34

Recording with Ease for Beginners (EASY.Q Mode) ....................................................................35

Reviewing and Searching when Recording (REC SEARCH) .......................................................36

Searching a quickly for a desired scene (Setting the Zero Memory) (SC-D364/D366 only) ....37

Self Record using the Remote Control (Setting the Self Timer) (SC-D364/D366 only)............38

Zooming In and Out.......................................................................................................................... 39

Using the Tele Macro........................................................................................................................ 39

Using the Fade In and Out............................................................................................................... 40

Using Back Light Compensation Mode (BLC) ...............................................................................41

Using the COLOR NITE (COLOR NITE)........................................................................................42

Using the LIGHT (SC-D362/D364/D365/D366 only)......................................................................43

目目錄錄

注注意意事事項項和和安安全全說說明明瞭瞭解解舅舅的的攝攝錄錄放放影影機機

特性...................................................................................................................................................... 7

攝錄放影機所提供的配.......................................................................................................................8

正視圖和左視圖 ..................................................................................................................................9

左視圖................................................................................................................................................ 10

右視圖和頂視圖.................................................................................................................................11

後視圖和底視圖 ................................................................................................................................12

遙控器（僅限 SC-D364/D366）.........................................................................................................13

準準備備工工作作

使用手提帶和透鏡蓋.........................................................................................................................14

安裝裏電池 ........................................................................................................................................15

使用裏離子電池組 ............................................................................................................................16

連接電源............................................................................................................................................ 19

關於操作模式 ....................................................................................................................................19

使用快速選單 ....................................................................................................................................20

相機/播放機模式下的 OSD（螢幕顯示）...........................................................................................21

M.Cam/M.Player 模式下的 OSD（螢幕顯示）（僅限 SC-D363/D364/D365/D366）.......................22

開啓/關閉 OSD（螢幕顯示）.............................................................................................................22

..............................................................................14

起起始始設設定定：：系系統統選選單單設設定定

（（時時鐘鐘設設定定））

設定時鐘設定無線遙控器接收

（（榛榛聲聲））

設定榛聲設定快門聲響選擇 OSD 語言觀賞示範怜面

................................................................................................................................25

（（快快門門聲聲響響））

（（語語言言））

（（示示範範怜怜面面））

起起始始設設定定：：顯顯示示選選單單設設定定

調整 LCD 螢幕（（LCD

（（日日期期/時時間間））

顯示日期/時間設定電視機顯示

基基本本錄錄製製

使用觀景鎖 ........................................................................................................................................32

放入/彈出錄影帶 ...............................................................................................................................32

各種錄製技巧 ....................................................................................................................................33

進行舅的第一次錄製.........................................................................................................................34

初學者可輕瑪地進行錄製檢視和搜尋錄製快速搜尋所要的場景使用遙控器進行自錄製

放大和縮小 ........................................................................................................................................39

使用望遠微距 ....................................................................................................................................39

使用淡入和淡出 ................................................................................................................................40

使用背光補償模式 (BLC).................................................................................................................41

使用色彩夜拍

使用燈光（僅限 SC-D362/D364/ D365/D366）................................................................................ 43

（（電電視視機機顯顯示示））

..............................................................................32

（（錄錄製製搜搜尋尋））

（（色色彩彩夜夜拍拍））

..............................................................5

..............................................................7

.........................................................................................................................23

（（遙遙控控器器））

（僅限 SC-D363/D364/D365/D366）......................................................26

......................................................................................................................27

.................................................................................................................28

亮亮度度

/ LCD

...............................................................................................................30

（（簡簡易易拍拍攝攝模模式式））

（（設設定定零零記記憶憶））

（（設設定定自自拍拍計計時時器器））

.................................................................................................................42

...................................................23

（僅限 SC-D364/D366）...................................................................24

...................................................29

色色彩彩））

...........................................................................................29

.........................................................................................................31

......................................................................................35

.............................................................................................................36

（僅限 SC-D364/D366）...........................................................37

（僅限 SC-D364/D366）...............................................38

ENGLISH

Contents

Advanced Recording ...........................................................44

Selecting the Record Mode & Audio Mode.....................................................................................44

Cutting Off Wind Noise (WindCut Plus).........................................................................................45

Selecting the Real Stereo.................................................................................................................46

Setting the Shutter Speed & Exposure ...........................................................................................47

Auto Focus / Manual Focus .............................................................................................................48

Programed Automatic Exposure Modes (Program AE)................................................................49

Setting the White Balance................................................................................................................ 51

Applying Visual Effects .....................................................................................................................52

Setting the 16:9 Wide .......................................................................................................................54

Setting the Digital Image Stabilizer (DIS) ........................................................................................55

Zooming In and Out with Digital Zoom (Digital Zoom) .................................................................56

Still Image Recording........................................................................................................................57

Searching for a still image ........................................................................................................57

Playback ..............................................................................58

Playing Back a Tape You have recorded on the LCD Screen.......................................................58

Various Functions while in Player Mode .........................................................................................59

Zooming during Playback (PB ZOOM) ...........................................................................................61

Audio Dubbing (SC-D364/D366 only) .............................................................................................62

Dubbed Audio Playback ...................................................................................................................63

Tape Playback...................................................................................................................................64

Audio Effect .......................................................................................................................................66

Setting the AV In/Out (SC-D365/D366 only) ...................................................................................67

Digital Still Camera Mode (SC-D363/D364/D365 /D366 only)....68

Using a Memory Card (Usable Memory Card) (not supplied)...................................................68

Memory Card Functions...........................................................................................................68

Inserting a Memory Card ......................................................................................................... 68

Ejecting a Memory Card ..........................................................................................................68

Structure of Folders and Files on the Memory Card ......................................................................69

Selecting the Memory Type (SC-D366 only) ..................................................................................70

Selecting the Photo Quality.................................................................................................... ..........71

Setting the File Number.................................................................................................................... 72

Taking a Photo Image (JPEG) on the Memory Card..................................................................... 73

Viewing Photo Images (JPEG) ........................................................................................................74

To view a Single Image............................................................................................................ 74

To view a Slide Show...............................................................................................................74

To view the Multi Display ........................................................................................................74

Protection from accidental Erasure..................................................................................................75

Deleting Photo Images and Moving Images................................................................................... 76

Formatting a Memory Card ..............................................................................................................78

Recording a Moving Images (MPEG) on a Memory Card ............................................................79

Playing a Moving Images (MPEG) on a Memory Card (M.Play Select)......................................80

Recording Still Images from a Cassette .........................................................................................81

Copying Still Images from a Cassette to Memory Card (Photo Copy)........................................82

Copying Files from the Memory Card to the Built-in Memory (Copy to) (SC-D366 only)...........83

Marking Images for Printing (Print Mark) .......................................................................................84

Removing the Print Mark .........................................................................................................84

目目錄錄

進進階階錄錄製製................................................................................................................................................................................

選擇錄製模式和聲訊模式.................................................................................................................44

消除風聲 (WindCut Plus)................................................................................................................45

選擇逼眞立體聲功能.........................................................................................................................46

設定快門速度和曝光.........................................................................................................................47

自動對焦/手動對焦 ...........................................................................................................................48

程序自動曝光模式 (Program AE)...................................................................................................49

設定白平衡 ........................................................................................................................................51

套用視訊效果 ....................................................................................................................................52

設定 16:9 寬螢幕模式.......................................................................................................................54

設定數位防手震功能 (DIS)...............................................................................................................55

使用數位縮放來放大及縮小

錄製靜止影像 ....................................................................................................................................57

搜尋靜止影像 ....................................................................................................................................57

播播放放

......................................................................................58

在 LCD 螢幕上播放舅所錄製的錄影帶 ...........................................................................................58

播放機模式中的各項功能.................................................................................................................59

在播放時縮放

配音（僅限 SC-D364/D366）.............................................................................................................62

配音後的聲訊播放 ............................................................................................................................63

錄影帶播放 ........................................................................................................................................64

聲訊效果............................................................................................................................................ 66

設定 AV In/Out（僅限 SC-D365/D366）...........................................................................................67

數數位位靜靜止止相相機機模模式式（（僅僅限限

（（可可用用記記憶憶賓賓））((未未提提供供))

使用記憶賓

記憶賓功能.............................................................................................................................68

揷入記憶賓.............................................................................................................................68

退出記憶賓.............................................................................................................................68

記憶賓中的資料夾與圭案結構......................................................................................................... 69

選擇記憶體類型（僅限 SC-D366）....................................................................................................70

選擇相片品質 ....................................................................................................................................71

設定圭案編號 ....................................................................................................................................72

拍攝記憶賓上的相片影像 (JPEG)................................................................................................... 73

檢視相片影像 (JPEG) ......................................................................................................................74

若要檢視單一影像................................................................................................................. 74

若要檢視連續放映................................................................................................................. 74

若要檢視多顯示..................................................................................................................... 74

保護以防止意外刪除.........................................................................................................................75

刪除相片影像和動態影像.................................................................................................................76

格式化記憶賓 ....................................................................................................................................78

錄製記憶賓上的動態影像 (MPEG)..................................................................................................79

播放記憶賓上的動態影像 (MPEG)（（M.Play

從錄影帶錄製靜止影像.....................................................................................................................81

將靜止影像從錄影帶複製到記憶賓將圭案從記憶賓複製到內建記憶體標記要列印的影像

移除列印標記.........................................................................................................................84

（（數數位位縮縮放放））

..........................................................................................56

（（播播放放縮縮放放））

.................................................................................................................61

SC-D363/D364/ D365/D366

...................................................................................................68

選選擇擇

）.........................................................................80

（（相相片片複複製製））

..............................................................................82

（（複複製製到到））

（（列列印印標標記記））

（僅限 SC-D366）..................................................... 83

.........................................................................................................84

））

......68

ENGLISH

Contents

PictBridgeTM(SC-D363/D364/D365/D366 only) ................85

Printing Your Pictures – Using the PictBridgeTM..............................................................................85

Connecting To a Printer............................................................................................................85

Selecting Images ......................................................................................................................86

Setting the Number of Prints .................................................................................................... 86

Setting the Date/Time Imprint Option .......................................................................................86

Printing Images ........................................................................................................................86

Canceling the Printing ..............................................................................................................86

IEEE 1394 Data Transfer......................................................87

Transferring IEEE1394 (i.LINK)-DV Standard Data Connections .................................................87

Connecting to a DV Device (DVD Recorder, Camcorder, etc.) .................................................87

Connecting to a PC ..................................................................................................................87

System Requirements............................................................................................................... 87

Recording with a DV Connection Cable ...................................................................................88

USB Interface (SC-D362/D363/D364/D365/D366 only) ...89

Using USB Interface (SC-D362/D363/D364/D365/D366 only) .....................................................89

Transferring a Digital Image through a USB Connection.......................................................... 89

USB Connection Speed depending on the System.....................................................................89

System Requirements............................................................................................................... 89

Selecting the USB Device (USB Connect) (SC-D363/D364/D365/D366 only) ..........................90

Installing DV Media PRO Program.................................................................................................. 91

Connecting to a PC ..........................................................................................................................92

Disconnecting the USB Cable ..................................................................................................92

Using the PC Camera Function ................................................................................................ 93

Using the USB Streaming Function ..........................................................................................94

Using the removable Disk Function (SC-D363/D364/D365/D366 only)....................................94

Maintenance........................................................................95

After Finishing a Recording.................................................................................................... ..........95

Usable Cassette Tapes.....................................................................................................................95

Cleaning and Maintaining the Camcorder.......................................................................................96

Using Your Camcorder Abroad........................................................................................................97

Troubleshooting...................................................................98

Troubleshooting.................................................................................................................................98

Self Diagnosis Display .............................................................................................................98

Self Diagnosis Display in M.Cam/M.Player Modes (SC-D363/D364/D365/D366 only)............99

Setting menu items......................................................................................................................... 101

Specifications ................................................................... 103

Index ................................................................................ 104

目目錄錄

PictBridge

列印相片 – 使用 PictBridgeTM...........................................................................................................85

IEEE 1394

傳輸 IEEE1394 (i.LINK)-DV 標準資料連接.....................................................................................87

USB

使用 USB 介面（僅限 SC-D362/D363/D364/D365/D366）.............................................................89

選擇 USB 裝置（（USB

安裝 DV Media PRO 程式................................................................................................................91

連接至電腦 ........................................................................................................................................92

（（僅僅限限

SC-D363/D364/D365/D366

連接印表機.............................................................................................................................85

選擇影像 ................................................................................................................................86

設定列印略數.........................................................................................................................86

設定日期/時間壓印選項 ........................................................................................................86

列印影像 ................................................................................................................................86

取消列印 ................................................................................................................................86

資資料料傳傳輸輸

..............................................................87

連接至 DV 裝置（DVD 錄放影機/ 攝錄放影機等）.............................................................87

連接至電腦.............................................................................................................................87

系統需求 ................................................................................................................................87

使用 DV 連接纜線進行錄製..................................................................................................88

介介面面（（僅僅限限

透過 USB 連接傳輸數位影像............................................................................................... 89

USB 連接的速度取決於系統 ................................................................................................89

系統需求 ................................................................................................................................89

拔下 USB 纜線 ......................................................................................................................92

使用 PC 相機功能................................................................................................................. 92

使用 USB 串流功能使用可隷式磁勒功能（僅限 SC-D363/D364/D365/D366）

SC-D362/D363/D364/D365/D366

連連接接））

（僅限 SC-D363/D364/D365/D366）.................................................. 90

..........................................................................................................94

維維護護 ............................................................................................................................................................................

完成錄製後

.....................................................................................................................................95

可用的錄影帶

淸潔和維護攝錄放影機.....................................................................................................................96

在國外使用攝錄放影機.....................................................................................................................97

故故障障排排除除

故障排除............................................................................................................................................ 98

設定選單項目.................................................................................................................................. 101

規規格格索索引引

.................................................................................................................................95

...............................................................................98

自我診斷顯示.........................................................................................................................98

M.Cam/M.Player 模式下的自我診斷顯示（僅限 SC-D363/D364/D365/D366）.................99

................................................................................... 103

................................................................................... 104

））

................85

））

.................89

....................................94

ENGLISH

C O

L O

R N

IT E

Notes and Safety Instructions

Notes regarding the Rotation of the LCD Screen

Please rotate the LCD Screen carefully as illustrated. Over rotation may cause damage to the inside of the hinge that connects the LCD Screen to the Camcorder.

1. Open the LCD Screen 90 degrees to the Camcorder with your finger.

2. Rotate it to the best angle to record or play.

■

If you rotate the LCD Screen 180 degrees so it is facing forward, you can close the LCD Screen with the facing out.

■

This is convenient during playback operations.

[Note]

Refer to page 29 to adjust brightness and color of the LCD Screen.

Notes regarding the LCD Screen, Viewfinder, Lens

1. Direct sunlight can damage the LCD Screen, the inside of the Viewfinder or the Lens. Take pictures of the sun only in low light conditions, such as at dusk.

2. The LCD Screen has been manufactured using high precision technology. However, there may be tiny dots (red, blue or green in color) that appear on the LCD Screen. These dots are normal and do not affect the recorded picture in any way.

3. Do not pick up the Camcorder by holding the Viewfinder, LCD Screen or Battery Pack.

4. Applying excessive force to the Viewfinder may damage it.

Notes regarding the Video Head Cleaning

■

To ensure normal recording and a clear picture, clean the video heads regularly. If a square block-shape distorts playback, or only a blue screen is displayed, the video heads may be dirty. If this happens, clean the video heads with a dry type cleaning cassette.

■

Do not use a wet-type cleaning cassette. It may damage the video heads.

LCD Open Knob

180 degrees (max.)

注注意意事事項項和和安安全全說說明明

有有關關旋旋轉轉

90 degrees to the Camcorder

90 degrees (max.)

附附註註

[

]

如需關於調整 LCD 螢幕的亮度和色彩的資訊，請參閱第 29 頁0

有有關關

LCD

有有關關淸淸潔潔磁磁頭頭的的注注意意事事項項

■

若要確保正常錄製淸劉相片，請經常淸潔磁頭0 若出現馬賽克失眞，或僅顯示藍色螢幕，視訊磁頭可能寧圓0 若發生此情況，請使用乾式淸潔磁帶來淸潔視訊磁頭0

■

請勿使用濕式淸潔磁帶0 央可能會損壞視訊磁頭0

螢螢幕幕的的注注意意事事項項

LCD

請小心旋轉 LCD 螢幕，如圖所示0 過度旋轉可能導致連接 LCD 螢幕和錄放影機的沽桔內部損毁0

1. 請用手指開啓 LCD 螢幕與攝錄放影機

呈 90 度角0

2. 將央旋轉至錄製或播放的最佳角度0

■

如果舅將 LCD 螢幕旋轉 180 度至面向前，舅可以關閉面朝外的 LCD 螢幕0

■

這樣在播放操作時會比較方便0

螢螢幕幕// 觀觀景景鎖鎖// 透透鏡鏡的的注注意意事事項項

1. 陽光直射會損壞 LCD 螢幕/ 觀景鎖的內部或透鏡0 請僅在光線微弱的情況下拍攝太陽的相片，譬如黃昏0

2. LCD 螢幕採用高精密技術製造0 LCD 螢幕上可能會出現一些小點（紅色/

藍色或綠色）0 這些小點屬於正常現象，不會影嚮錄製的影像0

3. 請勿以握住觀景鎖/ LCD 螢幕或電池組的方式拿起攝錄放影機0

4. 過度用力可能會損毁觀景鎖0

ENGLISH

Notes and Safety Instructions

Notes regarding Camcorder

■

Do not leave the Camcorder exposed to high temperatures (above 60 °C or 140 °F). For example, in a parked car in the sun or exposed to direct sunlight.

■

Do not let the Camcorder get wet. Keep the Camcorder away from rain, sea water, and any other form of moisture. If the Camcorder gets wet, it may get damaged. Sometimes a malfunction due to exposure to liquids cannot be repaired.

■

A sudden rise in atmospheric temperature may cause condensation to form inside the Camcorder.

- When you move the Camcorder from a cold location to a warm location (e.g. from outside to inside during the winter.)

- When you move the Camcorder from a cool location to a hot location (e.g. from inside to outside during the summer.)

■

If the (DEW) protection feature is activated, leave the Camcorder for at least two hours in a dry, warm room with the cassette compartment opened and the Battery Pack removed.

Notices regarding Copyright

Television programs, video tapes, DVD titles, films, and other program materials may be copyrighted. Unauthorized copying of copyrighted material may be against the law. All the trade names and registered trademarks mentioned in this manual or other documentation provided with your Samsung product are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders.

Servicing & Replacement Parts

■

Do not attempt to service this Camcorder yourself.

■

Opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards.

■

Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.

■

When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician has used replacement parts specified by the manufacturer and having the same characteristics as the original part.

■

Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, electric shock or other hazards.

注注意意事事項項和和安安全全說說明明

有有關關攝攝錄錄放放影影機機的的注注意意事事項項

■

有有關關著著作作權權的的注注意意事事項項

電視節目/ 錄影帶/ DVD 節目/ 影片，以及其他節目資料均受著作權法保護0 未經授權複製受著作權法保護的資料可能會違反法律0 此手冊或其他 Samsung 産品說明文件中提及的所有産品名稱和註冊商標是其各自所有者的商標或註冊商標0

維維修修和和更更換換零零件件

■

請勿將攝錄放影機暴露在高溫下（超過 60°C 或 140°F）0 例如，在陽光下停放的車內或陽光直射之下0 請勿讓攝錄放影機受潮0 將攝錄放影機遠離雨水/ 海水，以及任何其他形態的濕氣0 若攝錄放影機受潮，將會損壞0 本機受潮所導致的損壞有時可能無法修理0 突然升高的氣溫將導致本攝錄放影機內部形成濕氣凝結0

- 當舅將攝錄放影機從寒冷的地方帶入溫暖的地方（如，冬天時從戶

外帶入室內）0

- 當舅將攝錄放影機從祺爽的地方帶入炎熱的地方（如，夏天時從室

內帶出戶外）0

若啓動（露水）保護功能，請將攝錄放影機放在乾燥溫暖的室內至少兩個小時，橙打開錄影帶座和取出電池組0

請勿嘗試自行維修本攝錄放影機0 打開或移除機蓋可能會讓舅暴露在危險電壓或其他危險中0 請讓合格的專業技術人員進行維修0 在需要更換零件時，請確保維修技術人員使用製造商指定的更換零件，其特性與原始零件相同0 未經授權的更換可能會導致火災/ 觸電或其他危險0

ENGLISH

Getting to Know Your Camcorder

Features

■

Digital Data Transfer Function with IEEE1394

By incorporating the IEEE 1394 (i.LINK™: i.LINK is a serial data transfer protocol and interconnectivity system, used to transmit DV data) high speed data transport port, both moving and photo images can be transferred to a PC, making it possible to produce or edit various images.

■

USB Interface for Digital Image Data Transfer (SC-D362/D363/D364/D365/ D366 only)

You can transfer images to a PC using the USB interface without an add-on card.

■

PHOTO The PHOTO function lets you capture an object as a still, while in <Camera mode>.

■

1200x Digital Zoom

Allows you to magnify an image up to 1200 times its original size.

■

Audio Enhancement

Provides more powerful sound by with the Real Stereo and Audio Effect features.

■

Color TFT LCD

A high-resolution color TFT LCD gives you clean, sharp images as well as the ability to review your recordings immediately. A high-resolution color TFT LCD of 230K pixels supports 16:9 aspect ratio. (SC-D365/D366).

■

Digital Image Stabilizer (DIS)

The DIS compensates for any handshake, reducing unstable images particularly at high magnification.

■

Various Visual Effects

The Visual Effects allow you to give your films a special look by adding various special effects.

■

Back Light Compensation (BLC)

The BLC function compensates for a bright background behind a subject you're recording.

■

Program AE

The Program AE enables you to alter the shutter speed and aperture to suit the type of scene/action to be filmed.

■

High Power Zoom Lens

Power Zoom lens allows users to magnify the subject clearly up to x33 (x30 for SC-D263/D363).

■

Digital Still Camera Function (SC-D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

- Using Memory Card, you can easily record and playback standard photo

images.

- You can transfer standard photo images on the Memory Card to your PC

using the USB interface.

■

Moving Image Recording (SC-D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

Moving image recording makes it possible to record video onto a Memory Card.

■

Multi Memory Card Slot (SC-D365/D366 only)

Multi Memory Card slot is able to use Memory Stick (Duo), Memory Stick PRO, MMC and SD.

■

Built-in Memory (SC-D366 only)

You can use digital still camera functions without a separate external Memory Card, using the built-in memory installed in your Camcorder. (SC-D366: 32MB)

瞭瞭解解舅舅的的攝攝錄錄放放影影機機

特特性性

■

使使用用透過結合 IEEE 1394（i.LINK 部連接系統，通常用於傳遞 DV 資料）高速資料傳輸連接埠，可以將動態和相片影像傳輸到電腦，以便製作或編輯各種影像0

■

用用於於傳傳輸輸數數位位影影像像資資料料的的

D366

舅可以使用 USB 介面將影像傳輸到電腦，而不需要附加介面賓0

■

相相片片 PHOTO（相片）功能可以讓舅在 <Camera mode> 下將物體拍攝成靜止影像0

■

1200

可以讓舅將影像放大至其原始大小的 1200 倍0

■

聲聲訊訊增增强强透過逼眞立體聲和聲訊效果功能提供更强大的音效0

■

彩彩色色高解析度彩色 TFT LCD 可爲舅提供明亮/ 淸劉影像，同時具有立卽檢視錄影怜面的功能0 例.(SC-D365/D366)0

■

數數位位防防手手震震功功能能 DIS 可補償因手持拍攝時手急而引起的影像晃動，尤其是在較高的放大倍數下0

■

各各項項視視訊訊效效果果視訊效果可添加各種特殊效果，讓所拍攝的影像別具一格0

■

背背光光補補償償 BLC 功能可以補償舅所錄製的主體背後的明亮背景0

■

程程序序自自動動曝曝光光程序自動曝光可以讓舅改變快門速度和光圈，以適合所拍攝的場景/動作類型0

■

高高功功能能縮縮放放鏡鏡頭頭功能强大的縮放鏡頭可以讓使用者淸楚地將主體放大至 33 倍（SC- D263/D363 機型則可放大 30 倍）0

■

數數位位靜靜止止相相機機功功能能（（僅僅限限

- 舅可以使用記憶賓輕瑪地錄製和播放標準相片影像0

- 舅可以使用 USB 介面將標準相片影像從記憶賓傳輸到電腦0

■

動動態態影影像像錄錄製製（（僅僅限限動態影像錄製可將視訊錄製到記憶賓0

■

多多個個記記憶憶賓賓揷揷槽槽（（僅僅限限具有可使用 Memory Stick (Duo)/ Memory Stick PRO/ MMC 和 SD 的多個記憶賓揷槽0

■

內內建建記記憶憶體體（（僅僅限限舅可以在不需要個別外部記憶賓的情況下使用數位靜止相機功能，舅可以使用安裝在攝錄放影機中的內建記憶體0

(SC-D366: 32MB)

IEEE1394

））

倍倍數數位位縮縮放放

TFT LCD

(BLC)

數數位位資資料料傳傳輸輸功功能能

™

： i.LINK 是一系列資料傳輸通訊協定和內

介介面面（（僅僅限限

USB

SC-D362/D363/D364/D365/

高解析度彩色 TFT LCD 具有 23 萬像素，可支援 16:9 怜面比

(DIS)

SC-D363/D364/ D365/D366

SC-D363/D364/D365/D366

SC-D365/D366

SC-D366

））

ENGLISH

Getting to Know Your Camcorder

Accessories Supplied with Camcorder

Make sure that the following basic accessories are supplied with your digital video camera.

Basic Accessories

1. Lithium Ion Battery Pack

2. AC Power Adapter (AA-E8 TYPE)

3. AC Cord

4. Audio/Video Cable (SC-D263/D363)

5. Multi Cable (SC-D362/ D364/D365/D366)

6. Instruction Book/ Quick Guide

7. Lithium Battery for Remote Control (SC-D364/D366 only) or Clock. (TYPE: CR2025)

8. Remote Control (SC-D364/D366 only)

9. USB Cable (SC-D362/ D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

10. Software CD (SC-D362/ D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

11. Lens Cover

12. Lens Cover Strap

1. Lithium Ion Battery Pack

4. Audio/Video Cable (SC-D263/D363)

7. Lithium Battery (CR2025) 9. USB Cable (SC-D362

10. Software CD (SC-D362

/D363/D364/D365/D366)

2. AC Power Adapter (AA-E8 TYPE)

5. Multi Cable (SC-D362 /D364/D365/D366)

8. Remote Control (SC-D364/D366)

11. Lens Cover

瞭瞭解解舅舅的的攝攝錄錄放放影影機機

攝攝錄錄放放影影機機所所提提供供的的配配件件

確定數位視訊相機提供下列基本配件0

3. AC Cord

6. Instruction Book

/D363/D364/D365/D366)

12. Lens Cover Strap

基基本本配配件件

1. 裏離子電池組

2. 交流電源適配器（AA-E8 型）

3. 交流電源線

4. 聲訊/視訊纜線（SC- D263/D363）

5. Multi 纜線（SC-D362/

D364/D365/D366）

6. 說明書/快速指南

7. 用於遙控器（僅限 SC-

D364/D366）或時鐘的裏電池0（類型： CR2025）

8. 遙控器（僅限 SC-D364/D366）

9. USB 纜線（僅限 SC-

D362/D363/D364/ D365/D366）

10. 軟體 CD（僅限 SC-

D362/D363/D364/D365/ D366）

11. 透鏡蓋

12. 透鏡蓋帶子

ENGLISH

MF/AF

MULTI DISP.

Getting to Know Your Camcorder

Front & Left View

1. Lens

(SC-D362/D364/D365

(SC-D364/D366 only)

1. Lens

2. LIGHT ➥page 43 (SC-D362/D364/D365/D366 only)

3. Remote Sensor (SC-D364/D366 only)

4. TAPE EJECT

5. Internal MIC

6. EASY.Q Button ➥page 35

7. Function Buttons

Button <Player> <Camera> <M.Player> (SC-D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

œœœœ

REW REC SEARCH – REV

√√√√

√√

/❙❙ PLAY/STILL FADE S.SHOW (SLIDE SHOW)

■ STOP MF/AF MULTI DISP. (MULTI DISPLAY)

8. TFT LCD Screen

2. LIGHT

/D366 only)

3. Remote Sensor

4. TAPE EJECT

5. Internal MIC

FF REC SEARCH + FWD

瞭瞭解解舅舅的的攝攝錄錄放放影影機機

正正視視圖圖和和左左視視圖圖

6. EASY.Q Button

7. Function Buttons

8. TFT LCD Screen

鏡鏡頭頭

燈燈光光➥第第

遙遙控控感感應應鎖鎖（（僅僅限限

彈彈出出錄錄影影帶帶

內內建建麥麥克克風風

6. EASY.Q

功功能能按按瞿瞿

按按瞿瞿

œœœœ

√√√√

√√

/❙❙ 播放/靜止淡化 S.SHOW（連續放映）

■ 停止手動對焦 MULTI DISP. （多顯示）

8. TFT LCD

頁頁（（僅僅限限

（（簡簡易易拍拍攝攝））按按瞿瞿➥第第

回轉錄製搜尋 – 倒退

快進錄製搜尋 + 前進

SC-D362/D364/ D365/D366

SC-D364/D366

））

頁頁

（（僅僅限限

螢螢幕幕

））

SC-D363/D364/ D365/D366

））

ENGLISH

COLOR NITE

LIGHT

Getting to Know Your Camcorder

Left Side View

1. DISPLAY

2. MACRO/PB ZOOM

3. Speaker

4. Mode Switch

(MEMORY/TAPE)

(SC-D363/D364/D365

/D366 only)

1. DISPLAY ➥page 21

2. MACRO/PB ZOOM ➥page 39 / ➥page 61

3. Speaker

4. Mode Switch (MEMORY/TAPE) (SC-D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

5. Viewfinder

6. COLOR NITE ➥page 42

LIGHT (SC-D362/D364/D365/D366) ➥page 43

瞭瞭解解舅舅的的攝攝錄錄放放影影機機

左左視視圖圖

顯顯示示➥第第

微微距距/播播放放縮縮放放➥第第

喇喇叭叭

模模式式開開關關（（記記憶憶賓賓/錄錄影影帶帶））（（僅僅限限

記記憶憶錄錄影影帶帶

觀觀景景鎖鎖

色色彩彩夜夜拍拍➥第第

燈燈光光（（僅僅限限

頁頁

39 頁頁/ ➥第第61

頁頁

SC-D362/D364/D365/D366））➥第第43

SC-D363/D364/ D365/D366

5. Viewfinder

6. COLOR NITE

LIGHT (SC-D362/D364/D365/D366)

頁頁

））

1010

ENGLISH

Getting to Know Your Camcorder

Right & Top View

1. Zoom Lever

(VOL/Menu Dial)

2. PHOTO Button

3. QUICK MENU Button

4. MENU Button

5. Start/Stop Button

6. Power Switch

7. DC Jack

1. Zoom Lever (VOL/Menu Dial)

2. PHOTO Button ➥page 57

3. QUICK MENU Button

4. MENU Button

5. Start/Stop Button

6. Power Switch (CAMERA or PLAYER)

7. DC Jack

8. Jack Cover

9. Jacks

10. Cassette Door

11. Hand Strap Hook

Jacks

SC-D263

SC-D363

SC-D362/

D364/ D365/

D366

External MIC

QUICK MENU

IEEE1394 AV

IEEE1394 Multi

USB

Cable

瞭瞭解解舅舅的的攝攝錄錄放放影影機機

右右視視圖圖和和頂頂視視圖圖

AV/

USB

縮縮放放桿桿（（音音量量/選選單單轉轉盤盤））

（（相相片片））按按瞿瞿➥第第

2. PHOTO

3. QUICK MENU

4. MENU

5. Start/Stop

電電源源開開關關

6. PLAYER)

直直流流電電揷揷孔孔

揷揷孔孔蓋蓋

揷揷孔孔

錄錄影影帶帶倉倉蓋蓋

10.

手手提提帶帶高高

11.

（（快快速速選選單單））按按瞿瞿

（（選選單單））按按瞿瞿

（（開開始始/停停止止））按按瞿瞿

(CAMERA or

（（相相機機或或播播放放機機））

8. Jack Cover

9. Jacks (See below)

10. Cassette Door

11. Hand Strap Hook

揷揷孔孔

頁頁

SC-D263

SC-D363

SC-D362/

D364/ D365/

D366

外外接接式式麥麥克克風風

IEEE1394

USB

1111

纜纜線線

ENGLISH

BATTERY RELEASE

Getting to Know Your Camcorder

Rear & Bottom View

QUICK MENU

1. Lithium Battery Cover

2. Charging Indicator

1. Lithium Battery Cover

2. Charging Indicator

3. Memory Card Slot (SC-D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

4. Tripod Receptacle

5. Battery Release

Memory Card Slot (Usable Memory Card)

SC-D363/D364

SC-D365/D366

CHG

瞭瞭解解舅舅的的攝攝錄錄放放影影機機

後後視視圖圖和和底底視視圖圖

3. Memory Card Slot (SC-D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

4. Tripod Receptacle

裏裏電電池池蓋蓋

充充電電指指示示器器

記記憶憶賓賓揷揷槽槽（（僅僅限限

三三苛苛架架底底座座

電電池池釋釋放放轢轢

記記憶憶賓賓揷揷槽槽（（可可用用記記憶憶賓賓））

僅僅限限

SC-D363/D364

SC-D363/D364/ D365/D366

SC-D365/D366

5. Battery Release

））

1212

SD/MMC

Memory Stick Memory Stick PRO

SD/MMC

Memory Stick Memory Stick PRO

SD/MMC

ENGLISH

Getting to Know Your Camcorder

Remote Control (SC-D364/D366 only)

1. PHOTO

2. START/STOP

3. SELF TIMER

4. ZERO MEMORY

5. PHOTO SEARCH

œœ

10.

1. PHOTO Button ➥page 57

2. START/STOP Button

3. SELF TIMER Button ➥page 38

4. ZERO MEMORY Button ➥page 37

5. PHOTO SEARCH Button

6. A.DUB Button ➥page 62

√√√√

(FF) Button

œœœœ

(REW) Button

√√

(PLAY) Button

❙❙ / ❙❙

6. A.DUB

√√√√

œœœœ

(REW)

√√

(PLAY)

√√

(Direction)

(FF)

10.œœ❙❙ / ❙❙√√(Direction) Button ➥page 59

11. F. ADV Button ➥page 60

12. ■ (STOP) Button

13. ❙❙ (STILL) Button

14. SLOW (❙

15. DATE/TIME Button

16. X2 Button ➥page 60

17. W/T (Zoom) Button

18. DISPLAY Button

√√

) Button

瞭瞭解解舅舅的的攝攝錄錄放放影影機機

遙遙控控器器（（僅僅限限

1. PHOTO

2. START/STOP

按按瞿瞿

3. SELF TIMER

按按瞿瞿➥第第

4. ZERO MEMORY

按按瞿瞿➥第第

5. PHOTO SEARCH

按按瞿瞿

6. A.DUB

√√√√ （（快快進進））按按瞿瞿

œœœœ （（回回轉轉））按按瞿瞿

√√ （（播播放放））按按瞿瞿

SC-D364/D366

（（相相片片））按按瞿瞿➥第第

（（開開始始/停停止止））

（（自自拍拍計計時時器器））

頁頁

（（零零記記憶憶））

頁頁

（（相相片片搜搜尋尋））

（（配配音音））按按瞿瞿➥第第

18. DISPLAY

17. W/T (Zoom)

16. X2

15. DATE/TIME

14. SLOW(

13.

12. ■ (STOP)

11. F. ADV

頁頁

））

√√

❙

)

❙❙

(STILL)

10. œœ❙❙ / ❙❙

11. F. ADV

12. ■

13. ❙❙

14. SLOW ❙

15. DATE/TIME

16. X2

17. W/T

18. DISPLAY

√√ （（方方向向））按按瞿瞿

頁頁

➥第第59

（（逐逐幀幀播播放放））按按瞿瞿

頁頁

➥第第60

（（停停止止））按按瞿瞿

（（靜靜止止））按按瞿瞿

√√ （（慢慢動動作作））按按瞿瞿

按按瞿瞿➥第第

（（縮縮放放））按按瞿瞿

（（顯顯示示））按按瞿瞿

（（日日期期/時時間間））按按瞿瞿

頁頁

1313

ENGLISH

Preparation

Using the Hand Strap & Lens Cover

It is very important to ensure that the Hand Strap has been correctly adjusted before you begin your recording. The Hand Strap enables you to:

- Hold the Camcorder in a stable, comfortable position.

- Press the [Zoom] and [Start/Stop] button without having to change the position of your hand.

Hand Strap

Adjusting the Hand Strap

1. Insert the Hand Strap into the Hand Strap Hook on the front side of the Camcorder and pull its end through the hook.

2. Insert your hand into the Hand Strap and adjust its length for your convenience.

3. Close the Hand Strap.

Lens Cover

Attaching the Lens Cover

1. Hook up the Lens Cover with the Lens Cover Strap as illustrated.

2. Hook up the Lens Cover Strap to the Hand Strap, and adjust it following the steps as described for the Hand Strap.

3. Close the Hand Strap.

Installing the Lens Cover after Operation

Press buttons on both sides of the Lens Cover, then attach it to the Camcorder Lens.

1 2 3

1 2

2 3

準準備備工工作作

使使用用手手提提帶帶和和透透鏡鏡蓋蓋

開始拍攝之前，確定正確調整手提帶是非常重要的0 手提帶可以讓舅：

- 將攝錄放影機固定在穩定安全的位置0

- 不需要改變手的位置，卽可按下 [Zoom]（縮放）和 [Start/Stop]

（開始/停止）按瞿0

手手提提帶帶

調調整整手手提提帶帶

1. 將手提帶穿入攝錄放影機前方的手提帶高，橙拉至帶高的末端0

2. 將舅的手穿過手提帶，然後調整適合的長度0

3. 合上手提帶0

透透鏡鏡蓋蓋

裝裝上上透透鏡鏡蓋蓋

1. 使用透鏡蓋帶子連接透鏡蓋，如圖所示0

2. 將透鏡蓋帶子連接到手提帶，然後依照手

提帶所述步驟進行調整0

3. 合上手提帶0

完完成成操操作作後後安安裝裝透透鏡鏡蓋蓋

按下透鏡蓋兩邊的按瞿，然後將央蓋在攝錄放影機的鏡頭上0

1414

ENGLISH

CHG

QUICK MENU

Preparation

Lithium Battery Installation

Lithium Battery Installation for the Internal Clock

1. Remove the Battery Pack from the rear of the Camcorder.

2. Open the Lithium Battery Cover on the rear of the Camcorder.

3. Position the Lithium Battery in the Lithium Battery Holder, with the positive ( ) terminal face up. Be careful not to reverse the polarity of the Battery.

4. Close the Lithium Battery Cover.

Lithium Battery Installation for the Remote Control (SC-D364/D366 only)

1. Pull out the Lithium Battery Holder toward the direction of the arrow .

2. Position the Lithium Battery in the Lithium Battery Holder, with the positive ( ) terminal face up.

3. Reinsert the Lithium Battery Holder.

Precaution regarding the Lithium Battery

1. The Lithium Battery maintains the clock function and preset contents of the memory; even if the Battery Pack or AC Power adapter is removed.

2. The Lithium Battery for the Camcorder lasts about 6 months under normal operation from time of installation.

3. When the Lithium Battery becomes weak or dead, the date/time indicator will display <12:00 AM JAN.1,2006> when you set the <Date/Time> to <on>. When this occurs, replace the Lithium Battery with a new one (type CR2025).

4. There is a danger of explosion if Battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type.

Warning: Keep the Lithium Battery out of reach of children. Should

a battery be swallowed, consult a doctor immediately.

準準備備工工作作

安安裝裝裏裏電電池池

安安裝裝內內部部時時鐘鐘的的裏裏電電池池

1. 從攝錄放影機背面取出電池組0

2. 打開攝錄放影機背面的裏離子電池蓋0

3. 將裏電池放入裏電池座，正極 ( ) 端

向上0 千萬不可放錯電池的正負極方向0

4. 合上裏電池蓋0

安安裝裝遙遙控控器器（（僅僅限限

SC-D364/D366

1. 將裏電池座沿著箭頭方向拉出0

2. 將裏電池放入裏電池座，正極 ( ) 端

向上0

3. 重新裝入裏電池座0

有有關關裏裏電電池池的的注注意意事事項項

1. 裏電池可以保持時鐘功能及預設記憶體內容，卽使移除了電池組或交流電源適配器0

2. 在正常操作下，攝錄放影機的裏電池從裝入時間起可以維持大約

6 個月0

3. 在舅將 <Date/Time> 設定爲 <on>

或耗盡，日期/時間指示器將會顯示 <12:00 AM JAN.1,2006>0 發生此情況時，請更換新的裏電池（CR2025 型）0

4. 若沒有正確更換電池，將會有爆炸的危險0 請使用相同類型的電池來更換0

警警告告：：請請勿勿讓讓兒兒童童接接觸觸到到裏裏電電池池00 若若不不愼愼呑呑下下電電池池，，請請立立刻刻求求醫醫00

））的的裏裏電電池池

（（開開啓啓））

時，若裏電池電量不足

1515

ENGLISH

Preparation

Using the Lithium Ion Battery Pack

✤ Use SB-LSM80 or SB-LSM160 Battery Pack only. ✤ The Battery Pack may be charged a little at the time of purchase.

Charging the Lithium Ion Battery Pack

1. Turn the [Power] switch to [Off].

2. Attach the Battery Pack to the Camcorder.

3. Connect the AC Power Adapter to an AC Cord and connect the AC Cord to a wall socket.

4. Connect the DC cable to the DC jack on the Camcorder. The charging indicator will start to blink, showing that the Battery is charging.

5. Press and hold the DISPLAY button while charging and the charging status will be displayed on the LCD for 7 seconds.

As indicated the battery level is given as reference data for the user, it is the approximate estimation. It may differ from Battery capacity and temperature.

6. When the Battery is fully charged, disconnect the Battery Pack and the AC Power Adapter from the Camcorder. Even with the Power switched Off, the Battery Pack will still discharge.

Charging, Recording Times based on Model and Battery

ype.

✤ If you close the

LCD Screen, it switches off and the Viewfinder switches on automatically.

✤ The continuous

recording times given in the table to the right are approximations. Actual recording time depends on usage.

✤ The continuous recording times in the operating instructions are measured

using a fully charged Battery Pack at 77 °F (25 °C).

✤ Even when the Power switched Off, the Battery Pack will still discharge if it

is left attached to the device.

Blinking time

Once per second Twice per second Three times per second Blinking stops and stays on On for a second and off for a second

Time

Battery

SB-LSM80

SB-LSM160

(Option)

Charging

1hr 20min

time

Approx.

3hr

Charging rate

Less than 50% 50% ~ 75% 75% ~ 90% 90% ~ 100% Error - Reset the Battery Pack and the DC Cable

BBaatt ttee rryy cc hhaa rrggeedd

0% 50% 100%

Recording time

Viewfinder On

LCD On

Approx.

1hr 20min

Approx.

2hr 40min

Approx.

1hr 30min

Approx.

準準備備工工作作

使使用用裏裏離離子子電電池池組組

✤ 窄禿拗**SB-LSM80 或 SB-LSM160 電池組0 ✤ 埃q池組在購買時可能已經有少量電量0

爲爲裏裏離離子子電電池池組組充充電電

1. 將 [Power]

2. 在攝錄放影機中裝上

3. 將交流電源適配器連

4. 將直流電纜線連接到攝錄放影機上的直流電揷孔0

Battery Info

根根據據機機型型和和電電池池類類型型爲爲準準的的充充電電// 錄錄製製時時間間

✤ 若

✤ 右表提供的連續錄

3hr

✤

1616

（（電電源源））

開

關轉至 [Off]

（（關關閉閉））

電池組0

接到交流電源線，然後

閃閃鹵鹵時時間間

每秒一次每秒兩次每秒三次停止閃鹵橙保持亮起亮起一秒然後熄滅一秒

充充電電率率

少於 50%

50% ~ 75% 75% ~ 90% 90% ~ 100%

錯誤 - 重設電池組和直流電纜線

再將交流電源線連接到牆上揷座0

充電指示器將會開始閃鹵，顯示電池正在充電0

5. 在充電時按下 DISPLAY 按鍵，充電狀態將會在

LCD 上顯示 7 秒鐘0

所提供的電池電量是僅供使用者參考的資訊，爲大約數字0 央可能會與電池容量和溫度不同0

6. 電池完全充電後，從攝錄放影機拔下電池組和交流

電源適配器0 卽使將電源開關轉至 Off（關閉），電池組仍然會放電0

合上 LCD 螢幕，

央將關閉橙自動開啓觀景鎖0

製時間爲大約數字0 實際的錄製時間視使用情況而定0

操作說明中提供的連續錄製時間是根據在 77 °F (25 °C) 溫度下使

用完全充電的電池組所測得的結果0

將電池組留在本設備內，卽使將電源開關轉至 Off（關閉），電池

若

組仍然會放電0

電電池池

SB-LSM80

SB-LSM160

（選項）

時時間間

充充電電時時間間

大約 1 小時

20 分鐘

大約 3 小時

錄錄製製時時間間

開開啓啓

LCD

大約 1 小時

20 分鐘

大約 2 小時

40 分鐘

觀觀景景鎖鎖開開啓啓

大約 1 小時

30 分鐘

大約 3 小時

ENGLISH

Preparation

The amount of continuous recording time available depends on;

- The type and capacity of the Battery Pack you are using.

- Ambient temperature.

- How often the Zoom function is used.

- Type of use (Camcorder/Camera/With LCD Screen etc.). It is recommended that you have several batteries available.

Battery Level Display

The battery level display indicates the amount of power remaining in the Battery Pack. a. Fully charged b. 20~40% used c. 40~80% used d. 80~95% used e. Completely used (Blinking)

(The Camcorder will turn off soon, change the battery as soon as possible.)

Battery Pack Management

■

The Battery Pack should be recharged in an environment between 32 °F (0 °C) and 104 °F (40 °C).

■

The life and capacity of the Battery Pack will be reduced if it is used in temperatures below 32 °F (0 °C) or left in temperatures above 104 °F (40 °C) for a long period of time, even when it is fully recharged.

■

Do not put the Battery Pack near any heat source (i.e. fire or a heater).

■

Do not disassemble, apply pressure to, or heat the Battery Pack.

■

Do not allow the + and – terminals of the Battery Pack to be shortcircuited. It may cause leakage, heat generation, induce overheating or fire.

(Blinking)

準準備備工工作作

可可用用的的連連續續錄錄製製時時間間視視以以下下情情況況而而定定；；

- 舅使用的電池組類型和容量0

- 周圍環境的溫度0

- 是否經常使用縮放功能0

- 使用類型（攝錄放影機/相機/具備 LCD 螢幕等）0

建議舅準備數個備用電池0

電電池池容容量量顯顯示示電池容量顯示可指出電池組的剩餘電量0

a. 完全充電 b. 用完 20~40% c. 用完 40~80% d. 用完 80~95% e. 完全用完（閃鹵）

（攝錄放影機就快關閉，請細快更換電池0）

電電池池組組管管理理

■

電池組必須在介於 32 °F (0°C) 和 104 °F (40 °C) 的環境溫度下重新充電0

■

若在溫度低於 32 °F (0 °C) 的地方使用電池組，或者電池組長時間處於溫度高於 104 °F (40 °C) 的地方，電池組的使用壽命和容量將會減少，卽使央已經完全充電0

■

請勿將電池組放在迲近熱源的地方（如火或暖器）0

■

請勿阿開，甥壓或加熱電池組0

■

請勿讓電池組的 + 正極和 – 負極端形成短路0 這可能導致電池組漏液/ 發出熱量，引起過熱或火災0

1717

ENGLISH

Preparation

Notes regarding the Battery Pack

■

Please refer to the Table on page 16 for approximate continuous recording time.

■

The recording time is affected by temperature and environmental conditions.

■

The recording time shortens dramatically in a cold environment. As the environmental temperature and conditions vary.

■

The continuous recording times in the operating instructions are measured using a fully charged Battery Pack at 77 °F (25 °C). The remaining battery time may differ from the approximate continuous recording times given in the instructions.

■

It is recommended you use the original Battery Pack that is available at SAMSUNG service retailer. When the Battery reaches the end of its life, please contact your local dealer. The batteries have to be dealt with as chemical waste.

■

Make sure that the Battery Pack is fully charged before starting to record.

■

A brand new Battery Pack is not charged. Before using the Battery Pack, you need to charge it completely.

■

Fully discharging a Lithium Ion Battery damages the internal cells. The Battery Pack may be prone to leakage when fully discharged.

■

To preserve battery power, keep your Camcorder turned off when you are not operating it.

■

If your Camcorder is in <Camera> mode, and it is left in <STBY> mode without being operated for more than 5 minutes with a tape inserted, it will automatically turn itself off to protect against unnecessary battery discharge.

■

Make sure that the Battery Pack is fitted firmly into place.

Do not drop the Battery Pack. Dropping the Battery Pack may damage it.

準準備備工工作作

有有關關電電池池組組的的注注意意事事項項

■

請參考第 16 頁的表，以獲知大約的連續錄製時間0

■

錄製時間會受溫度和環境條件的影嚮0

■

在寒冷的環境溫度下，錄製時間會急速縮短0 環境溫度和條件會經常改變0

■

操作說明中提供的連續錄製時間是根據在 77 °F (25 °C) 溫度下使用完全充電的電池組所測得的結果0 剩餘的電池時間可能會與說明中提供的大約連續錄製時間有所不同0

■

建議舅使用向 SAMSUNG 經銷商購買的原廠電池組0 在電池到達其使用壽命時，請與當地經銷商聯繫0 必須以處理化學廢物的方式處理該電池0

■

開始拍攝之前，請確定電池組已經完全充電0

■

全新的電池組橙未經過充電0 使用電池組之前，舅必須將央完全充電0

■

裏離子電池若完全放電可能會損壞內部元件0 完全放電可能導致電池組漏液0

■

爲節省電池電量，在不使用時關閉攝錄放影機電源0

■

若攝錄放影機處於 <Camera> 模式，橙在揷入錄影帶的情況下，留在 <STBY> 模式不操作超過 5 分鐘，央將自動關閉以避免不必要的電池放電0

■

確定電池組已穩固安裝到位0

切切勿勿讓讓電電池池組組掉掉落落00 掉掉落落的的電電池池組組可可能能損損壞壞00

1818

ENGLISH

Q U

I C

K M E

Preparation

Connecting a Power Source

✤ There are two types of power source that can be connected to your

Camcorder.

- The AC Power adapter and AC Cord: used for indoor recording.

- The Battery Pack: used for outdoor recording.

Using a Household Power Source

Connect to a household power source to use the Camcorder without worrying about the battery power. You can keep the Battery Pack attached; the battery power will not be consumed.

1. Turn the [Power] switch to [OFF].

2. Connect the AC Power adapter (AA-E8 Type) to the AC Cord.

3. Connect the AC Cord to a wall socket. The plug and wall socket type may differ according to your resident country.

4. Connect the DC cable to the DC jack of the Camcorder.

5. Set the Camcorder to each mode by holding down the tab on the [Power] switch and turning it to the [CAMERA] or [PLAYER] mode.

About the Operating Modes

✤ The operating modes are determined by the position of the [Power]

switch and the [Mode] switch.

✤ Set the Operation Mode by adjusting [Power] switch and [Mode]

switch before operating any functions.

Mode Name

<Camera

Mode>

[Power] Switch

[Mode] Switch

(SC-D363/D364/

D365/D366 only)

[Note]

■

The <M.Cam> and the <M.Player> Modes are only enabled on SCD363/ D364/ D365/ D366.

<Player

Mode>

<M.Cam

Mode>

Power Switch

<M.Player

Mode>

準準備備工工作作

連連接接電電源源

✤ 有兩種電源類型可以連接到攝錄放影機0

- 交流電源適配器和交流電源線：用於室內拍攝0

- 電池組：用於戶外拍攝0

使使用用家家中中電電源源使用家中電源爲攝錄放影機供電，就不必常常

擔心電池電量的多寡0 舅可以讓電池組留在設備中，電池電量將不會消耗掉0

1. 將 [Power]

2. 將交流電源適配器（AA-E8 型）連接到交流

3. 將交流電源線連接到牆上揷座0

4. 將直流電纜線連接到攝錄放影機的直流電

5. 透過按住橙轉動 [Power]

[CAMERA]

（（相相機機））

（（電電源源））

或 [PLAYER]

關關於於操操作作模模式式

✤ 操作模式取決於 [Power] ✤ 操作任何功能之前，調整 [Power]

設定操作模式0

機機型型名名稱稱

[Power]

[Mode]

開開關關（（僅僅限限

D363/D364/

D365/D366

附附註註

[

■

<M.Cam> 和 <M.Player> 模式僅可在 SC-D363/ D364/

（（電電源源））

開開關關

（（模模式式））

]

SC-

））

D365/ D366 上啓用0

（（電電源源））

開關轉至 [Off]

電源線0

牆上揷座和揷頭類型會因不同的國家而異0

揷孔0

開關的標籤，可將攝錄放影機設定爲

（（播播放放機機））

模式0

開關和 [Mode]

（（電電源源））

（（模模式式））

開關和 [Mode]

<M.Cam Mode>

（（關關閉閉））

開關的位置0

（（模模式式））

開關來

<M.Player Mode>

1919

ENGLISH

Preparation

Using the QUICK MENU

✤ QUICK MENU is used to access Camcorder functions by using the

[QUICK MENU] button.

✤ QUICK MENU provides easier access to frequently used menus without

using the [MENU] button.

✤ Functions available using the QUICK MENU are as below:

Camera Mode

■

Setting the Digital Image Stabilizer (DIS) ➥page 55

■

Programed Automatic Exposure Modes (Program AE) ➥page 49

■

Setting the 16:9 Wide ➥page 54

■

Setting the White Balance (White Balance) ➥page 51

■

Setting the Shutter Speed (Shutter)- Only can be operated by using the QUICK MENU ➥page 47

■

Setting the Exposure (Exposure)- Only can be operated by using the QUICK MENU ➥page 47

■

Setting the Back Light Compensation (BLC) ➥page 41

M.Cam Mode

■

Setting the Memory Type (Memory Type) ➥page 70

■

Setting the White Balance (White Balance) ➥page 51

■

Setting the Photo Quality (Photo Quality) ➥page 71

■

Setting the Exposure (Exposure)- Only can be operated by using the QUICK MENU ➥page 47

■

Setting the Back Light Compensation (BLC) ➥page 41

M.Player Mode

■

Setting the Memory Type (Memory Type) ➥page 70

■

Playing the Moving Images (MPEG) on the Memory Card (M. Play Select) ➥page 80

■

Deleting Photo Images and Moving Images (Delete)

➥page 76

■

Protection from accidental Erasure (Protect) ➥page 75

■

Marking Images for Printing (Print Mark) ➥page 84

For example: Setting the White Balance

1. Press the [QUICK MENU] button. The quick menu list will appear.

2. Move the [Zoom] lever to the up or down to select <White Balance>, then press the [OK] button.

3. Move the [Zoom] lever to the up or down to select desired mode (Auto, Indoor, Outdoor or Custom WB), then press the [OK] button.

4. To exit, press the [QUICK MENU] button.

2020

DIS

Program AE 16:9 Wide White Balance Shutter Exposure BLC

Q.MENU

Exit

DIS Program AE 16:9 Wide

White Balance

Shutter Exposure BLC

Q.MENU

Exit

STBY

Off

STBY

Auto

STBY

準準備備工工作作

使使用用快快速速選選單單

✤ 秦z過使用 [QUICK MENU]

機的各項功能0

✤ 祐跌t選單提供在不使用 [MENU]

用的選單的方法0

✤ 祠拗僚跌t選單的可用功能如下：

0:00:10

60min

0:00:10

60min

…

†

0:00:10

60min

（（快快速速選選單單））

（（選選單單））

相相機機模模式式

■

設定數位防手震功能 (DIS) ➥第 55 頁

■

程序自動曝光模式 (Program AE) ➥第 49 頁

■

設定 16:9 寬螢幕 ➥第 54 頁

■

設定白平衡（白平衡）➥第 51 頁

■

設定快門速度（快門）- 僅可透過使用快速選單來操作

➥第 47 頁

■

設定曝光（曝光）- 僅可透過使用快速選單來操作

➥第 47 頁

■

設定 BLC（背光補償）➥第 41 頁

模模式式

M.Cam

■

設定記憶體類型（記憶體類型）➥第 70 頁

■

設定白平衡（白平衡）➥第 51 頁

■

設定相片品質（相片品質）➥第 71 頁

■

設定曝光（曝光）- 僅可透過使用快速選單來操作

➥第 47 頁

■

設定 BLC（背光補償）➥第 41 頁

模模式式

M.Player

■

設定記憶體類型（記憶體類型）➥第 70 頁

■

播放記憶賓上的動態影像 (MPEG)（M. Play 選擇）

➥第 80 頁

■

刪除相片影像和動態影像（刪除）➥第 76 頁

■

保護以防止意外刪除（保護）➥第 75 頁

■

標記要列印的影像（列印標記）➥第 84 頁

例例如如：：設設定定白白平平衡衡

1. 按下 [QUICK MENU]

快速選單淸單將會顯示0

2. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom] （（白白平平衡衡））

Balance>

3. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]（（縮放）桿以選擇所要的模式

（（

Auto

Indoor

（（確確定定））

下 [OK]

4. 按 [QUICK MENU]

按瞿卽可使用快速選單存取攝錄放影

按瞿的情況下，更方便存取經常使

（（快快速速選選單單））

，然後按下 [OK]

Outdoor或 Custom WB）），然後按

按瞿0

（（快快速速選選單單））

（（縮縮放放））

按瞿0

桿以選擇 <White

（（確確定定））

按瞿0

按瞿以結束0

ENGLISH

Preparation

OSD (On Screen Display) in Camera/Player Modes

1. Battery Level ➥page 17

2. Visual Effects Mode ➥page 52

3. EASY.Q ➥page 35

4. DIS ➥page 55

5. Program AE ➥page 49

6. White Balance Mode ➥page 51

7. Shutter Speed ➥page 47

8. Exposure ➥page 47

9. Manual Focus ➥page 48

10. Date/Time ➥page 30

11. Zoom Position ➥page 39

12. COLOR NITE ➥pages 42

13. USB ➥page 92 (SC-D362/D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

14. Remote ➥page 24 (SC-D364/D366 only)

15. WindCut Plus ➥page 45

16. BLC (Back Light Compensation)

➥page 41

17. LIGHT ➥page 43 (SC-D362/D364/D365/D366 only)

18. Real Stereo ➥page 46

19. Audio Mode ➥page 44

20. Remaining Tape (measured in minutes)

21. Tape Counter

22. Zero Memory ➥page 37 (SC-D364/D366 only)

23. Record Speed Mode ➥page 44

24. Operating Mode

25. Self Timer ➥page 38 (SC-D364/D366 only)

26. Photo image

27. Tele Macro ➥page 39

28. Dubbed Audio Playback ➥page 63

29. DEW ➥page 6

30. Warning Indicator ➥page 98

31. Message Line ➥page 98

32. Volume Control ➥page 58

33. DV IN (DV data transfer mode) ➥page 87

34. AV IN ➥page 67 (SC-D365/D366 only)

35. Audio Dubbing ➥page 62 (SC-D364/D366 only)

OSD in Camera Mode

Art

2 3 4

5 6

7 8 9

10Sec

S. 1/50

[29]

12:00 AM JAN.1,2006

W T

†

S. 1/50

†

[29]

OSD in Player Mode

30 31

†

[10]

12:00 AM JAN.1,2006

準準備備工工作作

相相機機/播播放放機機模模式式下下的的

23 2224

STBY

No Tape !

0:00:11

14min

16BIt

Color N.1/30

…

√

0:00:00:10

14minSound[2]

16BIt

AV In

…

20 19 18 17 16 15

14 13 12

（（螢螢幕幕顯顯示示））

OSD

電電池池容容量量

3. EASY.Q

4. DIS

10.

11.

12.

13. USB ➥第 92 頁

14.

15.

16. BLC

17.

18.

19.

20.

21.

22.

23.

24.

25.

26.

27.

28.

29. DEW ➥第 6 頁

30.

31.

32.

33. DV

34. AV

35.

➥第 17 頁

視視訊訊效效果果模模式式

程程序序自自動動曝曝光光白白平平衡衡模模式式快快門門速速度度曝曝光光手手動動對對焦焦日日期期/時時間間縮縮放放位位置置色色彩彩夜夜拍拍

D364/D365/D366

遙遙控控消消除除風風聲聲

燈燈光光

D365/D366

逼逼眞眞立立體體聲聲聲聲訊訊模模式式剩剩餘餘的的錄錄影影帶帶（（以以分分鐘鐘計計算算））錄錄影影帶帶計計數數器器零零記記憶憶錄錄製製速速度度模模式式操操作作模模式式自自拍拍計計時時器器相相片片影影像像望望遠遠微微距距配配音音後後的的聲聲訊訊播播放放

警警告告指指示示器器訊訊息息行行音音量量控控制制

配配音音

➥第 52 頁

（（簡簡易易拍拍攝攝））

（（數數位位防防手手震震功功能能））

➥第 49 頁

➥第 51 頁

➥第 47 頁

➥第 48 頁

➥第 30 頁 ➥第 39 頁 ➥第 42 頁

（（僅僅限限

➥第 24 頁

➥第 45 頁

（（背背光光補補償償））

➥第 43 頁

））

➥第 46 頁

➥第 44 頁

➥第 37 頁

➥第 41 頁

（（僅僅限限

➥第 44 頁

➥第 38 頁

➥第 39 頁

➥第 98 頁

➥第 58 頁

輸輸入入（（

資資料料傳傳輸輸模模式式））

輸輸入入

➥第 67

（（僅僅限限

➥第 62 頁

➥第 35 頁

➥第 55 頁

SC-D362/D363/

））

SC-D364/D366

SC-D362/D364/

（（僅僅限限

SC-D364/D366

（（僅僅限限

➥第 63 頁

頁頁（（僅僅限限

SC-D365/D366

SC-D364/D366

））

SC-D364/D366

➥第 87 頁

））

2121

））

ENGLISH

Preparation

OSD (On Screen Display) in M.Cam/M.Player Modes (SC-D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

1. Photo Quality

➥page 71

2. CARD (Memory Card) Indicator

3. Image Counter (Total number of recordable photo images)

4. Image Recording and Loading Indicator

5. Erase Protection Indicator ➥page 75

6. Print Mark ➥page 84

7. Folder Number File Number

➥page 72

8. JPEG Image Size

9. Slide Show ➥page 74

Turning the OSD (On Screen Display) On/Off

urning OSD On/Off

Press the [DISPLAY] button on the left side control panel.

■ Each press of the button toggles the OSD function on and off.

■ When you turn the OSD off,

-In <Camera Mode>: The STBY, REC modes are always displayed on the screen, even when the OSD is turned off.

-In <Player Mode>: When you press any Function Button, it is

urning the Date/Time On/Off

To turn the Date/Time on or off, access the menu and change the

<Date/Time> mode. ➥page 30

2222

displayed on the OSD for 3 seconds before it turns off.

OSD in M.Cam Mode OSD in M.Player Mode

3 min

No Memory Card !

[29]

12:00 AM JAN.1,2006

W T

[29]

…

†

準準備備工工作作

M.Cam/M.Player

（（僅僅限限

SC-D363/D364/D365/D366

001

12:00 AM JAN.1,2006 100-0002

開開啓啓/關關閉閉

按下左控制台上的 [DISPLAY]

■

每按一下按瞿卽可切換開啓或關閉 OSD 功能0

■

關閉 OSD 時，

OSD

模模式式下下的的

Slide

No Memory Card !

（（螢螢幕幕顯顯示示））

2/46

800X600

（（顯顯示示））

- 在 <Camera Mode> 下：卽使關閉 OSD 且輸入資料顯示 3 秒然後關閉，螢幕上會一直顯示 STBY（待機）/ REC（錄製）模式0

- 在 <Player Mode> 下：當舅按下任何功能按瞿時，該功能會在 OSD 上顯示 3 秒然後關閉0

開開啓啓/關關閉閉日日期期/時時間間

若要開啓或關閉日期/時間，請存取選單橙變更 <Date/Time> 模式0 ➥第 30 頁

OSD

按瞿0

（（螢螢幕幕顯顯示示））

））

相相片片品品質質

資資料料夾夾編編號號-圭圭案案編編號號

8. JPEG

➥第 71 頁賓賓（（記記憶憶賓賓））指指示示器器影影像像計計數數器器（（可可錄錄製製的的相相片片影影像像的的總總數數））影影像像錄錄製製和和載載入入指指示示器器刪刪除除保保護護指指示示器器

➥第 75 頁

列列印印標標記記

➥第 84 頁

➥第 72 頁

影影像像大大小小

連連續續放放映映

➥第 74 頁

ENGLISH

Initial Setting : System Menu Setting

Setting the Clock (Clock Set)

✤ Clock setup works in <Camera>/<Player>/<M.Cam>/<M.Player>

modes. ➥page 19

✤ The Date/Time is automatically recorded onto a tape. Before

recording, please set the <Date/Time>. ➥page 30

1. Set the [Power] switch to [CAMERA] or [PLAYER].

2. Set the [Mode] switch to [TAPE] or [MEMORY]. (SCD363/D364/D365/D366 only)

3. Press the [MENU] button.

■

The menu list will appear.

4. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select <System>, then press the [OK] button.

5. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select <Clock Set>, then press the [OK] button.

■

The year will be highlighted first.

6. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to set current <Year>, then press the [OK] button.

■

The month will be highlighted.

7. You can set the month, day, hour and minute following the same procedure after setting the year.

8. Press the [OK] button after setting the minutes.

■

A message <Complete !> is displayed.

■

To adjust the clock, select the Year, Month, Day, Hour or Min by pressing the [OK] button, then move the [Zoom] lever to the up or down to set respective values.

9. To exit, press the [MENU] button.

[ Notes ]

■

After the Lithium Battery loses its charge (after about 6 months), the date/time appears on the screen as <12:00 AM JAN.1,2006>.

■

You can set the year up to 2037.

■

If the Lithium Battery is not installed, any inputted data will not be backed up.

Camera Mode

√System

Clock Set Remote Beep Sound Language Demonstration

Move Select Exit

Camera Mode

Back Clock Set

Remote Beep Sound Language Demonstration

Adjust Select Exit

Camera Mode

Back Clock Set

Remote Beep Sound Language Demonstration

Move Select Exit

起起始始設設定定：：系系統統選選單單設設定定

設設定定時時鐘鐘（（時時鐘鐘設設定定））

✤ 時鐘設定功能可在 <Camera>/<Player>/<M.Cam>/<M.Player>模式

下操作0 ➥第 19 頁

✤ 日期/時間將自動記錄到錄影帶中0 錄影之前，請設定 <Date/Time>0

➥第 30 頁

（（電電源源））

開關設定爲 [CAMERA] 或

（（播播放放機機））

[PLAYER]

[MEMORY]

（（模模式式））

開關設定爲 [TAPE]

（（記記憶憶賓賓））

（（錄錄影影帶帶））

（僅限 SC-D363/D364/ D365/D366）

■

選單淸單將會顯示0

<System>，然後按下 [OK]

<Clock Set>，然後按下 [OK]

■

將會先反白顯示年略0

<Year>，然後按下 [OK]

■

將會反白顯示月略0

（（縮縮放放））

（（確確定定））

（（縮縮放放））

（（確確定定））

（（縮縮放放））

（（確確定定））

桿以選擇

按瞿0

桿以選擇

按瞿0

桿以設定目前

按瞿0

和分鐘0

（（確確定定））

■

一則 <Complete !> 訊息將會顯示0

■

若要調整時鐘，請按下 [OK]

按瞿0

（（確確定定））

按瞿以選擇

年/ 月/ 日/ 小時或分鐘，然後向上或向下移動

（（縮縮放放））

附附註註

[Zoom]

]

桿以設定個別的數値0

（（選選單單））

按瞿以結束0

裏電池耗電（大約 6 個月）後，螢幕上的日期/時間顯示爲 <12:00 AM JAN.1,2006>0 舅最多可以將年略設定爲 20370 若沒有安裝裏電池，任何輸入資料都將無法備略0

2323

√On √On √English √On

MENUOKZOOM

JAN 1 2006

12 : 00 AM

MENUOKZOOM

JAN 1 2006

12 : 00 AM

Complete !

MENUOKZOOM

1. 將 [Power]

2. 將 [Mode]

3. 按下 [MENU] 按瞿0

4. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

5. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

…

†

6. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

7. 舅可以依照設定年略的相同程序來設定月/ 日/ 小時

8. 設定分鐘後，請按下 [OK]

9. 按 [MENU]

[

■

或

ENGLISH

Initial Setting : System Menu Setting

Setting the Wireless Remote Control Acceptance (Remote) (SC-D364/D366 only)

✤ The Remote function works in <Camera>/<Player>/<M.Cam>/

<M.Player> modes. ➥page 19

✤ The Remote function allows you to enable or disable the remote

control for use with the Camcorder.

1. Set the [Power] switch to [CAMERA] or [PLAYER].

2. Set the [Mode] switch to [TAPE] or [MEMORY].

3. Press the [MENU] button.

■

The menu list will appear.

4. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select <System>, then press the [OK] button.

5. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select

√System

<Remote>, then press the [OK] button.

6. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select <On> or <Off>, then press the [OK] button.

7. To exit, press the [MENU] button.

[ Note ]

If you set the <Remote> to <Off> in the menu and try to use it, the remote control icon ( ) will blink for 3 seconds on the LCD Screen and then disappear.

2424

（（僅僅限限

Camera Mode

Clock Set Remote Beep Sound Language Demonstration

Move Select Exit

Camera Mode

Back

Clock Set

Remote

Beep Sound Language Demonstration

Move Select Exit

起起始始設設定定：：系系統統選選單單設設定定

設設定定無無線線遙遙控控器器接接收收（（遙遙控控器器））

SC-D364/D366

✤ 遙控功能可在 <Camera>/<Player>/<M.Cam>/<M.Player>模式下操

作0 ➥第 19 頁

✤ 遙控功能可以讓舅啓用或停用攝錄放影機的遙控器0

1. 將 [Power]

2. 將 [Mode]

3. 按下 [MENU] 按瞿0

4. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

5. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

√On √On √English √On

Off On

MENUOKZOOM

6. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

7. 按 [MENU]

附附註註

[

若舅在選單中將 <Remote> 設定爲 <Off> 橙嘗試使用央，LCD 螢幕上的遙控器圖示 ( ) 將會閃鹵 3 秒然後消失0

））

（（電電源源））

開關設定爲 [CAMERA] 或

（（播播放放機機））

[PLAYER]

[MEMORY]

■

選單淸單將會顯示0

<System>，然後按下 [OK]

<Remote>，然後按下 [OK]

<Off>，然後按下 [OK]

]

（（模模式式））

開關設定爲 [TAPE]

（（記記憶憶賓賓））

（（選選單單））

按瞿以結束0

（（縮縮放放））

（（確確定定））

（（錄錄影影帶帶））

（（縮縮放放））

（（確確定定））

按瞿0

（（縮縮放放））

（（確確定定））

按瞿0

桿以選擇 <On> 或

按瞿0

桿以選擇

或

ENGLISH

Initial Setting : System Menu Setting

Setting the Beep Sound (Beep Sound)

✤ The Beep Sound function works in <Camera>/<Player>/<M.Cam>/

<M.Player> modes. ➥page 19

✤ You can turn the Beep Sound on or off, when on,

each press of a button sounds a beep.

1. Set the [Power] switch to [CAMERA] or [PLAYER].

2. Set the [Mode] switch to [TAPE] or [MEMORY]. (SC-D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

3. Press the [MENU] button.

■

The menu list will appear.

4. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select <System>, then press the [OK] button.

5. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select <Beep Sound>, then press the [OK] button.

6. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select <On> or <Off>, then press the [OK] button.

7. To exit, press the [MENU] button.

Camera Mode

√System

Clock Set Remote Beep Sound Language Demonstration

Move Select Exit

Camera Mode

Back

Clock Set Remote

Beep Sound

Language Demonstration

Move Select Exit

起起始始設設定定：：系系統統選選單單設設定定

設設定定榛榛聲聲（（榛榛聲聲））

✤ 榛聲功能可在 <Camera>/<Player>/<M.Cam>/<M.Player> 模式下操

作0 ➥第 19 頁

√On √On √English √On

MENUOKZOOM

Off On

MENUOKZOOM

✤ 舅可以將「榛聲」開啓或關閉，開啓時每按一個按瞿

就會發出一次榛聲0

[PLAYER]

[MEMORY]

（（電電源源））

開關設定爲 [CAMERA] 或

（（播播放放機機））

（（模模式式））

開關設定爲 [TAPE]

（（記記憶憶賓賓））

（（錄錄影影帶帶））

1. 將 [Power]

2. 將 [Mode]

（僅限 SC-D363/D364/ D365/D366）

3. 按下 [MENU] 按瞿0

■

選單淸單將會顯示0

4. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom] <System>，然後按下 [OK]

5. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom] <Beep Sound>，然後按下 [OK]

6. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom] <Off>，然後按下 [OK]

7. 按 [MENU]

（（選選單單））

按瞿以結束0

（（確確定定））

（（縮縮放放））

（（確確定定））

（（縮縮放放））

桿以選擇

按瞿0

桿以選擇

（（確確定定））

按瞿0

桿以選擇 <On> 或

按瞿0

2525

或

ENGLISH

Initial Setting : System Menu Setting

Setting the Shutter Sound (Shutter Sound) (SC-D363/D364/D365 /D366 only)

✤ The Shutter Sound function works in both <Player> and <M.Cam>

modes. ➥page 19

✤ You can turn the Shutter Sound on or off, when on, with each press

of the [PHOTO] button the Shutter will sound.

1. Set the [Power] switch to [CAMERA] or [PLAYER].

2. If the [Power] switch is set to [CAMERA], set the [Mode] switch to [MEMORY]. If the [Power] switch is set to [PLAYER], set the [Mode] switch to [TAPE].

3. Press the [MENU] button.

■

The menu list will appear.

4. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select <System>, then press the [OK] button.

5. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select <Shutter Sound>, then press the [OK] button.

6. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select <On> or <Off>, then press the [OK] button.

7. To exit, press the [MENU] button.

2626

√System

（（僅僅限限

Player Mode

Clock Set Remote Beep Sound Shutter Sound Language

Move Select Exit

Player Mode

Back

Clock Set Remote Beep Sound

Shutter Sound

Language

Move Select Exit

起起始始設設定定：：系系統統選選單單設設定定

設設定定快快門門聲聲響響（（快快門門聲聲響響））

SC-D363/D364/D365/D366

✤ 快門聲響功能可在 <Player> 和 <M.Cam> 模式下操作0 ➥第 19 頁 ✤ 舅可以將「快門聲響」開啓或關閉，開啓時每按一下 [PHOTO] 按瞿，

快門將會發出聲響0

（（電電源源））（（播播放放機機））

[PLAYER]

（（電電源源））

（（相相機機））

，請將 [Mode]

（（記記憶憶賓賓））

[MEMORY]

如果 [Power] （（播播放放機機））（（錄錄影影帶帶））

■

（（電電源源））

，則將 [Mode]

選單淸單將會顯示0

<System>，然後按下 [OK]

<Shutter Sound>，然後按下 [OK]

<Off>，然後按下 [OK]

（（選選單單））

√On √On √On √English

Off On

1. 將 [Power]

2. 如果 [Power]

3. 按下 [MENU] 按瞿0

4. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

MENUOKZOOM

5. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

6. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

7. 按 [MENU]

MENUOKZOOM

））

開關設定爲 [CAMERA] 或

開關設定爲 [CAMERA]

（（模模式式））

開關設定爲

開關設定爲 [PLAYER]

（（模模式式））

開關設定爲 [TAPE]

（（縮縮放放））

桿以選擇

（（確確定定））

按瞿0

（（縮縮放放））

桿以選擇

（（確確定定））

（（縮縮放放））

桿以選擇 <On> 或

（（確確定定））

按瞿0

按瞿以結束0

按瞿0

ENGLISH

Initial Setting : System Menu Setting

Selecting the OSD Language (Language)

✤ The Language function works in <Camera>/<Player>/<M.Cam>/

<M.Player> modes. ➥page 19

✤ You can select the desired language to display the menu screen and

the messages.

1. Set the [Power] switch to [CAMERA] or [PLAYER].

起起始始設設定定：：系系統統選選單單設設定定

選選擇擇

✤ 語言功能可在 <Camera>/<Player>/<M.Cam>/<M.Player> 模式下操

✤ 舅可以選擇所要的選單怜面顯示語言和訊息0

2. Set the [Mode] switch to [TAPE] or [MEMORY]. (SC-D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

3. Press the [MENU] button.

■

The menu list will appear.

4. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select <System>, then press the [OK] button.

5. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select <Language>, then press the [OK] button.

■

The available language options are listed.

6. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select desired OSD language, then press the [OK] button.

■

The OSD language is refreshed in selected

Camera Mode

√System

Clock Set Remote Beep Sound Language Demonstration

Move Select Exit

language.

7. To exit, press the [MENU] button.

[ Note ] The word <Language> in the menu is always indicated in English.

[ 選單中的 <Language> 這個字始終以英文顯示0

OSD

作0 ➥第 19 頁

√On √On √English √On

MENUOKZOOM

附附註註

]

語語言言（（語語言言））

1. 將 [Power]

2. 將 [Mode]

3. 按下 [MENU] 按瞿0

4. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

5. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

6. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

7. 按 [MENU]

（（電電源源））

開關設定爲 [CAMERA] 或

（（播播放放機機））

[PLAYER]

[MEMORY]

（（模模式式））

開關設定爲 [TAPE]

（（記記憶憶賓賓））

（僅限 SC-D363/D364/ D365/D366）

■

選單淸單將會顯示0

<System>，然後按下 [OK]

<Language>，然後按下 [OK]

■

可用的語言選項將會列出0

的 OSD 語言，然後按下 [OK]

■

OSD 語言將更新爲所選的語言0

（（選選單單））

按瞿以結束0

（（縮縮放放））

（（確確定定））

（（縮縮放放））

（（確確定定））

（（縮縮放放））

（（確確定定））

（（錄錄影影帶帶））

桿以選擇

按瞿0

桿以選擇

按瞿0

桿以選擇所要

按瞿0

或

2727

ENGLISH

Initial Setting : System Menu Setting

Viewing the Demonstration (Demonstration)

✤ The Demonstration function may only be used in the

<Camera> mode without a tape inserted in the Camcorder. ➥page 19

✤ Before you begin: Make sure that there is no tape

inserted in the Camcorder. ➥page 32

✤ Demonstration automatically shows you the major

functions that are included with your Camcorder so that you may use them more easily.

✤ The Demonstration operates repeatedly until the

Demonstration mode is switched Off.

1. Set the [Power] switch to [CAMERA].

2. Set the [Mode] switch to [TAPE]. (SC-D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

3. Press the [MENU] button.

■

The menu list will appear.

4. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select <System>, then press the [OK] button.

5. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select <Demonstration>, then press the [OK] button.

6. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select <On>, then press the [OK] button.

7. Press the [MENU] button.

■

The Demonstration will begin.

8. To quit the Demonstration, press the [MENU] button.

[ Notes ]

■

The Demonstration function is automatically activated when the Camcorder is left idle for more than 10 minutes after switching to the <Camera> mode if (no tape is inserted in the Camcorder).

■

If you press other buttons (FADE, MF/AF, PHOTO, EASY.Q) during the Demonstration mode,

the demonstration stops temporarily and resumes 10 minutes later if you do not operate any other functions.

2828

Camera Mode

√System

Clock Set

Remote

Beep Sound Language Demonstration

Move Select Exit

Camera Mode

Back

Clock Set

Remote

Beep Sound Language

Demonstration

Move Select Exit

SAMSUNG Camcorder is...

Demonstration

起起始始設設定定：：系系統統選選單單設設定定

觀觀賞賞示示範範怜怜面面（（示示範範怜怜面面））

✤「示範怜面」功能僅可以在 <Camera> 模式中使用，

橙且攝錄放影機中必須沒有揷入錄影帶0 ➥第 19 頁

✤ 開始使用之前：請確定攝錄放影機中沒有揷入錄影

帶0 ➥第 32 頁

✤ 示範怜面將自動顯示攝錄放影機中的主要功能，讓舅

可以更輕瑪地使用這些功能0

✤ 示範怜面會重複操作直到關閉示範怜面模式0

（（電電源源））

開關設定爲 [CAMERA]0

（（模模式式））

開關設定爲 [TAPE]

■

選單淸單將會顯示0

（（縮縮放放））

<System>，然後按下 [OK]

（（確確定定））

（（縮縮放放））

<Demonstration>，然後按下 [OK]

（（縮縮放放））

後按下 [OK]

■

（（確確定定））

按瞿0

示範怜面將會開始0

]

切換到 <Camera> 模式（若攝錄放影機中沒有揷入錄影帶）後，若攝錄放影機處於閒置狀態超過 10 分鐘，「示範怜面」功能將會自動啓動0 若舅在示範怜面模式下按下其他按瞿（FADE（淡化）/ MF/AF（手動對焦/自動對焦）/ PHOTO/ EASY.Q（簡易拍攝）），示範怜面將暫時停止，橙在舅沒有操作任何其他功能的 10 分鐘後恢復0

√On √On √English √On

Off On

1. 將 [Power]

2. 將 [Mode] （僅限 SC-D363/D364/ D365/D366）

3. 按下 [MENU] 按瞿0

4. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

MENUOKZOOM

5. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

6. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

7. 按下 [MENU] 按瞿0

8. 若要結束示範怜面，請按下 [MENU]

MENUOKZOOM

[

■

附附註註

（（錄錄影影帶帶））

桿以選擇

按瞿0

桿以選擇

（（確確定定））

按瞿0

桿以選擇 <On>，然

（（選選單單））

按瞿0

ENGLISH

QUICK MENU

Initial Setting : Display Menu Setting

Adjusting the LCD Screen (LCD Bright/LCD Color)

✤ Adjusting the LCD Screen works in <Camera>/<Player>/<M.Cam>/

<M.Player> modes. ➥page 19

✤ Your Camcorder is equipped with a 2.5 inch (SC-D263/D362/D363/

D364) / 2.7 inch wide (SC-D365/D366) color Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) Screen, which enables you to view what you are recording or playing back directly.

✤ Depending on the conditions under which you are

using the Camcorder (indoors or outdoors for example), you can adjust;

- <LCD Bright>

- <LCD Color>

1. Set the [Power] switch to [CAMERA] or [PLAYER].

2. Set the [Mode] switch to [TAPE] or [MEMORY]. (SC-D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

3. Press the [MENU] button.

■

The menu list will appear.

4. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select <Display>, then press the [OK] button.

5. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select the item you want to adjust (LCD Bright or LCD Color), then press the [OK] button.

6. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to adjust the value of the selected item (LCD Bright or LCD Color), then press the [OK] button.

■

You can set values for <LCD Bright> and

7. To exit, press the [MENU] button.

■

<LCD Color> between <0> ~ <35>.

Adjusting the LCD Screen does not affect the brightness and color of the image to be recorded.

起起始始設設定定：：顯顯示示選選單單設設定定

調調整整

✤ 調整 LCD 螢幕可在 <Camera>/<Player>/<M.Cam>/<M.Player>模式

下操作0 ➥第 19 頁

✤ 此攝錄放影機具備 2.5 英勝 (SC-D263/D362/D363/D364) / 2.7 英勝寬

(SC-D365/D366) 彩色液晶顯示 (LCD) 螢幕，可以讓舅檢視錄製的影

像或直接播放0

Camera Mode

√Display

LCD Bright LCD Color Date/Time TV Display

Move Select Exit

Camera Mode

Back LCD Bright

LCD Color Date/Time TV Display

Adjust Select Exit

√Off √On

LCD

MENUOKZOOM

螢螢幕幕（（

LCD

亮亮度度

/ LCD

色色彩彩））

✤ 視舅使用此攝錄放影機的條件（例如，室內或戶外）

而定，請調整：

- <LCD Bright>

- <LCD Color>

[PLAYER]

[MEMORY]

（（電電源源））

開關設定爲 [CAMERA] 或

（（播播放放機機））

（（模模式式））

開關設定爲 [TAPE]

（（記記憶憶賓賓））

1. 將 [Power]

2. 將 [Mode]

（僅限 SC-D363/D364/ D365/D366）

3. 按下 [MENU]

■

4. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom] <Display>，然後按下 [OK]

5. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

（（選選單單））

選單淸單將會顯示0

按瞿0

（（縮縮放放））

（（確確定定））

（（縮縮放放））

桿以選擇舅要調整

按瞿0

的項目（（LCD Bright 或 LCD Color）），然後按下

（（確確定定））

[OK]

6. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

按瞿0

（（縮縮放放））

桿以調整選定項目

的値（（LCD Bright 或 LCD Color）），然後按下 [OK]

（（確確定定））

按瞿0

■

[18]

舅可以將 <LCD Bright> 和 <LCD Color> 設定爲 <0> ~ <35> 之間的値0

7. 按 [MENU]

（（選選單單））

■

調整 LCD 螢幕不會影響要錄製的影像的亮度和

按瞿以結束0

色彩0

（（錄錄影影帶帶））

桿以選擇

2929

或

ENGLISH

Initial Setting : Display Menu Setting

Displaying the Date/Time (Date/Time)

✤ The Date/Time function works in <Camera>/<Player>/<M.Cam>/

<M.Player> modes. ➥page 19

✤ The date and time are automatically recorded on a special data area

of the tape.

1. Set the [Power] switch to [CAMERA] or [PLAYER].

2. Set the [Mode] switch to [TAPE] or [MEMORY]. (SC-D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

3. Press the [MENU] button.

■

The menu list will appear.

4. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select <Display>, then press the [OK] button.

5. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select <Date/Time>, then press the [OK] button.

6. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select the display type of the Date/Time, then press the [OK] button.

■

Display type of the Date/Time: <Off>, <Date>, <Time>, <Date&Time>.

7. To exit, press the [MENU] button.

[ Notes ]

■

The Date/Time will read <12:00 AM JAN.1,2006> in the following conditions.

- During playback of a blank section of a tape.

- If the tape was recorded before setting the

<Date/Time> in the Camcorder.

- When the Lithium Battery becomes weak or dead.

■

Before you use the <Date/Time> function, you must set the clock. ➥page 23

3030

Camera Mode

√Display

LCD Bright LCD Color Date/Time TV Display

Move Select Exit

Camera Mode

LCD Bright LCD Color

Date/Time

TV Display

Move Select Exit

起起始始設設定定：：顯顯示示選選單單設設定定

顯顯示示日日期期/時時間間（（日日期期/時時間間））

✤ 日期/時間功能可在 <Camera>/<Player>/<M.Cam>/<M.Player>模式

Back

下操作0 ➥第 19 頁

√Off √On

MENUOKZOOM

Off Date Time Date&Time

MENUOKZOOM

✤ 日期和時間會自動記錄在錄影帶的特殊資料區域0

[PLAYER]

[MEMORY]

（（電電源源））

開關設定爲 [CAMERA] 或

（（播播放放機機））

（（模模式式））

開關設定爲 [TAPE]

（（記記憶憶賓賓））

（（錄錄影影帶帶））

1. 將 [Power]

2. 將 [Mode]

（僅限 SC-D363/D364/ D365/D366）

3. 按下 [MENU] 按瞿0

■

選單淸單將會顯示0

4. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom] <Display>，然後按下 [OK]

5. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom] <Date/Time>，然後按下 [OK]

6. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom] 的顯示類型，然後按下 [OK]

■

日期/時間的顯示類型： <Off>

<Time>

<Date&Time>0

7. 按 [MENU]

附附註註

[

■

（（選選單單））

按瞿以結束0

]

在下列情況下，日期/時間將顯示爲

<12:00 AM JAN.1,2006>0

播放錄影帶的空白部略0 若錄影帶是在設定攝錄放影機的 <Date/Time> 之前錄製的0 裏電池電量不足或耗盡0 使用 <Date/Time>功能之前，舅必須設定時鐘0

（（縮縮放放））

（（確確定定））

（（縮縮放放））（（確確定定））

（（縮縮放放））

桿以選擇日期/時間

（（確確定定））

按瞿0

<Date>

桿以選擇

按瞿0

➥第 23 頁

或

ENGLISH

Initial Setting : Display Menu Setting

Setting the TV Display (TV Display)

✤ The TV Display function works in <Camera>/<Player>/<M.Cam>/

<M.Player> modes. ➥page 19

✤ You can select the output path of the OSD (On Screen Display).

- <Off>: The OSD appears in the LCD Screen and Viewfinder only.

- <On>: The OSD appears in the LCD Screen, Viewfinder and TV. (Connecting to a TV ➥page 64, 65)

- Use the [DISPLAY] button to turn the OSD on/off on the LCD Screen/Viewfinder/TV.

1. Set the [Power] switch to [CAMERA] or [PLAYER].

2. Set the [Mode] switch to [TAPE] or [MEMORY]. (SC-D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

3. Press the [MENU] button.

■

The menu list will appear.

4. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select <Display>, then press the [OK] button.

5. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select <TV Display>, then press the [OK] button.

6. To activate TV Display function, move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select <On> or <Off>, then press the [OK] button.

7. To exit, press the [MENU] button.

Camera Mode

√Display

LCD Bright LCD Color Date/Time TV Display

Move Select Exit

Camera Mode

Back

LCD Bright LCD Color Date/Time

TV Display

Move Select Exit

起起始始設設定定：：顯顯示示選選單單設設定定

設設定定電電視視機機顯顯示示（（電電視視機機顯顯示示））

✤ 電視機顯示功能可在 <Camera>/<Player>/<M.Cam>/<M.Player> 模

式下操作0 ➥第 19 頁

✤ 舅可以選擇 OSD（螢幕顯示）的輸出路徑0

- <Off>： OSD 僅顯示在 LCD 螢幕和觀景鎖中0

- <On>： OSD 僅顯示在 LCD 螢幕/ 觀景鎖和電視機上0 （連接至電視 ➥第 64/ 65 頁）

- 使用 [DISPLAY]

上的 OSD0

√Off √On

MENUOKZOOM

Off On

MENUOKZOOM

（（顯顯示示））

按瞿來開啓/關閉 LCD 螢幕/觀景鎖/電視機

[PLAYER]

[MEMORY]

（（電電源源））

開關設定爲 [CAMERA] 或

（（播播放放機機））

（（模模式式））

開關設定爲 [TAPE]

（（記記憶憶賓賓））

（（錄錄影影帶帶））

1. 將 [Power]

2. 將 [Mode]

（僅限 SC-D363/D364/ D365/D366）

3. 按下 [MENU] 按瞿0

■

選單淸單將會顯示0

4. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom] <Display>，然後按下 [OK]

5. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom] <TV Display>，然後按下 [OK]

（（縮縮放放））

（（確確定定））

（（縮縮放放））

桿以選擇

按瞿0

桿以選擇

（（確確定定））

按瞿0

6. 若要啓動電視機顯示功能，請向上或向下移動

（（縮縮放放））

[Zoom]

（（確確定定））

[OK]

7. 按 [MENU]

桿以選擇 <On> 或 <Off>，然後按下

按瞿0

（（選選單單））

按瞿以結束0

3131

或

ENGLISH

QUICK MENU

Basic Recording

Using the Viewfinder

✤ In the [PLAYER] mode, the Viewfinder will work

when the LCD Screen is closed.

✤ In the [CAMERA] mode, the Viewfinder will work

when the LCD Screen is closed or rotated counterclockwise 180°.

Adjusting the Focus

The focus adjustment knob of the Viewfinder enables individuals with vision problems to see clearer images.

1. Close the LCD Screen and pull out the Viewfinder.

2. Use the Focus adjustment Knob of the Viewfinder to focus the picture.

[ Note ]

■

Viewing the sun or any strong light source through the Viewfinder for a prolonged period may be harmful, or cause temporary impairment.

Inserting / Ejecting a Cassette

✤ When inserting a tape or closing the

cassette compartment, do not apply excessive force. As it may cause a malfunction.

✤ Do not use any tape other than Mini DV

cassettes.

1. Connect a power source and slide the [TAPE EJECT] switch.

■

The cassette door opens automatically.

2. Insert a tape into the cassette compartment with the tape window facing outward and the protection tab toward the top. (Inserting a Cassette)

■

Remove the cassette tape, which is automatically ejected by pulling the cassette out. (Ejecting a Cassette)

3. Press the area marked [PUSH] on the cassette door until it clicks into place.

■

4. Close the cassette door.

The cassette is loaded automatically.

3232

基基本本錄錄製製

使使用用觀觀景景鎖鎖

✤ 在 [PLAYER]

LCD 螢幕時操作0

✤ 在 [CAMERA]

LCD 螢幕時操作，或以逆時針方向旋轉 180°0

調調整整焦焦距距觀景鎖的焦距調整旋瞿可以讓視線有問題的人看

到更淸劉的影像0

1. 合上 LCD 螢幕，然後拉出觀景鎖0

2. 使用觀景鎖的焦距調整旋瞿對焦影像0

附附註註

[

✤ 長時間透過觀景鎖直視太陽或任何强烈光源可能導

致傷害，或造成暫時的損害0

放放入入/彈彈出出錄錄影影帶帶

3. 按下錄影帶倉蓋上標記有 [PUSH]

■

錄影帶將自動裝入0

4. 關閉錄影帶倉蓋0

（（播播放放機機））

]

✤ 在放入錄影帶或關閉錄影帶座時，請勿

過度用力，否則可能會導致裝置故障0

✤ 請勿使用Mini DV 錄影帶以外的其他錄

影帶0

1. 連接電源，橙滑動 [TAPE EJECT] （（彈彈出出錄錄影影帶帶））

■

2. 將錄影帶揷入錄影帶座，橙讓錄影帶鎖

朝前，保護標籤朝上0

■

模式下，觀景鎖可在合上

（（相相機機））

模式下，觀景鎖可在合上

開關0

錄影帶倉蓋將自動打開0

（（放放入入錄錄影影帶帶））

拉出自動彈出的錄影帶，將央取出0

（（彈彈出出錄錄影影帶帶））

（（推推））

的區域直到賓入到位0

ENGLISH

D C

C I N

D C I

DC IN

Basic Recording

Various Recording Techniques

✤ In some situations different recording techniques may be required.

1. General recording.

2. Downward recording.

Making a recording with a top view of the LCD Screen.

3. Upward recording.

Making a recording viewing the LCD Screen from below.

4. Self recording.

Making a recording viewing the LCD Screen from the front.

5. Recording with the Viewfinder.

In circumstances where it is difficult to use the LCD Screen, the Viewfinder can be used as a convenient alternative.

[ Note ]

Please rotate the LCD Screen carefully as excessive rotation may cause damage to the inside of the hinge that connects the LCD Screen to the Camcorder.

1 2

3 4

基基本本錄錄製製

各各種種錄錄製製技技巧巧

✤ 在某些情況下，可能需要採用不同的錄製技巧0

一一般般錄錄製製00

往往下下錄錄製製00

從 LCD 螢幕向下看進行錄製0

往往上上錄錄製製

附附註註

[

]

請小心旋轉 LCD 螢幕，因爲過度的旋轉可能會導致連接 LCD 螢幕及攝錄放影機的沽桔內部損壞0

從下方檢視 LCD 螢幕進行錄製0

自自錄錄製製00

從前方檢視 LCD 螢幕進行錄製0

使使用用觀觀景景鎖鎖進進行行錄錄製製00

在無法使用 LCD 螢幕的情況下，觀景鎖是可提供便利的癩一選擇0

3333

ENGLISH

QUICK MENU

Basic Recording

Making your First Recording

1. Connect a power source to the Camcorder. ➥page 19 (A Battery pack or a AC Power adapter) Insert a cassette. ➥page 32

2. Remove the Lens Cover.

3. Set the [Power] switch to [CAMERA].

■

Open the LCD Screen.

■

Set the [Mode] switch to [TAPE]. (SC-D363/D364/

D365/D366 only) Make sure that <STBY> is displayed.

■

If the write protection tab of the cassette is open (set to save), <STOP> and <Protection!> will be displayed. Release the write protection tab to record.

■

Make sure the image you want to record appears on the LCD Screen or Viewfinder.

■

Make sure the Battery Level indicates that there is enough remaining power for your expected recording time.

■

You can select the Record Mode of your choice. ➥pages 44, 45, 46

4. To start recording, press the [Start/Stop] button.

■

<REC●> is displayed on the LCD Screen.

To stop recording, press the [Start/Stop] button again.

■

<STBY> is displayed on the LCD Screen.

[ Note ]

Detach the Battery Pack when you are finished recording to prevent unnecessary battery power consumption.

3434

√

基基本本錄錄製製

進進行行舅舅的的第第一一次次錄錄製製

1. 將電源連接到攝錄放影機0

➥第 19 頁

（電池組或交流電源適配器）

放入錄影帶0 ➥第 32 頁

2. 取下透鏡蓋0

3. 將 [Power]

√

■

確保舅要錄製的影像出現在 LCD 螢幕或觀景鎖上0

■

確保電池電量表示尙有足觀的剩餘電量可供舅的預計錄製時間使用0

■

舅可以選擇所要的錄製模式0

REC

0:00:10

●

[

附附註註

√

60min

]

在舅完成錄製時取出電池組，以避免不必要的電池耗電0

➥第 44/ 45/ 46 頁

4. 若要開始錄製，請按 [Start/Stop]

瞿0

■

<REC ● >出現在 LCD 螢幕上0 若要停止錄製，請再次按 [Start/Stop]

（（開開始始/停停止止））

■

<STBY>出現在 LCD 螢幕上0

按瞿0

（（電電源源））

開關設定爲

（（相相機機））

[CAMERA]

■

打開 LCD 螢幕0

■

將 [Mode] 定爲 [TAPE]

（僅限 SC

D365/D366）確保顯示

<STBY>0

■

如果錄影帶的寫入保護標

（（模模式式））

開關設

（（錄錄影影帶帶））

-D363/D364/

籤打開（設定以保存）， <STOP>及<Protection!> 將顯示0 解除寫入保護標籤以進行錄製0

（（開開始始/停停止止））

按

ENGLISH

COLOR NITE

LIGHT

Basic Recording

Recording with Ease for Beginners (EASY.Q Mode)

✤ The EASY.Q function works only in <Camera> mode. ➥page 19 ✤ The EASY.Q function allows a beginner to easily make good

recordings.

1. Set the [Power] switch to [CAMERA].

2. Set the [Mode] switch to [TAPE]. (SC-D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

3. By pressing the [EASY.Q] button, all functions on the Camcorder will be set to off and the recording settings will be set to the following basic modes:

■

The words <EASY.Q> and <DIS ( )> are displayed at the same time.

4. Press the [Start/Stop] button to start recording.

■

Recording will begin using the basic automatic settings.

5. Press the [EASY.Q] button again in the STBY mode and then turn the EASY.Q mode off.

■

The EASY.Q function will not turn off while you are recording.

■

The Camcorder will return to the settings that were set prior to activating EASY.Q mode.

[ Notes ]

■

In EASY.Q mode, certain functions are not available, such as Menu, BLC, Manual focus. If you want to use these functions, you must first turn the EASY.Q mode off.

■

The EASY.Q mode settings are deleted when the Battery Pack is removed from the Camcorder and must be reset when the Battery Pack is replaced.

■

Taking a still image using the [PHOTO] button while EASY.Q is set releases the DIS function.

■

Digital Zoom, COLOR NITE or Visual Effect is not available in the EASY.Q mode.

■

16:9 Wide is not available in the EASY.Q mode(SCD263/D362/D363/D364 only)

基基本本錄錄製製

初初學學者者可可輕輕瑪瑪地地進進行行錄錄製製（（簡簡易易拍拍攝攝模模式式））

✤ 簡易拍攝功能僅可在 <Camera>模式下操作0 ➥第 19 頁 ✤ 簡易拍攝功能可以讓初學者輕瑪地進行完美錄製0

（（電電源源））

開關設定爲 [CAMERA]0

（（模模式式））

開關設定爲 [TAPE]

（（簡簡易易拍拍攝攝））機上的所有功能將被設定爲關閉，同時錄製設定將被設定爲以下基本模式：

■

<EASY.Q> 和 <DIS ( )> 的文字會同時出現0

■

錄製將使用基本的自動設定開始進行0

■

當舅正在錄製時，簡易拍攝功能將不會關閉0

■

攝錄放影機會返回到啓動簡易拍攝模式前所設的

（（開開始始/停停止止））

按瞿，然後關閉簡易拍攝模式0

設定0

]

在簡易拍攝模式中，特定功能無法使用，如選單/ 背光補償 (BLC)/ 手動對焦0 若舅要使用這些功能，舅必須先關閉簡易拍攝模式0 簡易拍攝模式設定在電池組從攝錄放影機取下時刪除，同時必須在裝回電池組後重設0 在設定了簡易拍攝時使用 [PHOTO] 按瞿拍攝靜止影像，將解除數位防手震 (DIS) 功能0

Digital Zoom/ COLOR NITE（色彩夜拍）或 Visual Effect 不可在簡易拍攝模式中使用0 16:9 寬螢幕不可在簡易拍攝模式中使用（僅限 SC- D263/D362/D363/D364）

√

STBY

1. 將 [Power]

2. 將 [Mode] （僅限 SC-D363/D364/ D365/D366）

3. 透過按 [EASY.Q]

4. 按下 [Start/Stop]

5. 再次在 STBY 模式中按 [EASY.Q]

（（簡簡易易拍拍攝攝））

附附註註

[

0:00:10

60min

■

（（錄錄影影帶帶））

按瞿，攝錄放影

按瞿以開始錄製0

3535

ENGLISH

LIGHT

COLOR NITE

LIG

Basic Recording

Reviewing and Searching when a Recording (REC SEARCH)

✤ The REC SEARCH function works only in <Camera> mode.

➥page 19

✤ Used to review previously recorded images or to find a point to

基基本本錄錄製製

檢檢視視和和搜搜尋尋錄錄製製（（錄錄製製搜搜尋尋））

✤ 錄製搜尋功能僅可在 <Camera> 模式下操作0 ➥第 19 頁 ✤ 可用於檢視之前已錄製的影像或在 STBY 模式下尋胥要錄製新影像的

record a new image in the STBY mode.

Record Search (REC SEARCH)

1. Set to STBY mode by pressing [Start/Stop] button.

2. [REC SEARCH -] enables you to play the recording backwards and [REC SEARCH +] enables you to play it forwards, as long as you keep each button pressed down.

■

If you press the [REC SEARCH -] button in STBY mode, your Camcorder will play in reverse for 3 seconds and return to the original position automatically.

[ Notes ]

■

Mosaic shaped distortion may appear on the screen while in Record Search mode.

■

Pressing [Start/Stop] button after REC SEARCH will overwrite the images recorded after that point.

When a cassette is loaded and the Camcorder is left in the STBY mode for more than 5 minutes without being used, it will switch off automatically. To use it again, press the [Start/Stop] button or set the [Power] switch to [Off] and then back to [CAMERA]. This auto power off feature is designed to save Battery power.

當裝入了錄影帶，而攝錄放影機苛置在 STBY（待機）模式中超過 5 分鐘未被使用時，裝置將自動關閉0 要恢復使用，請按 [Start/Stop] 開關設定爲 [Off] 關閉的功能是爲節省電池電源而設計0

點0

錄錄製製搜搜尋尋

(REC SEARCH)

1. 按下 [Start/Stop]

（（開開始始/停停止止））

按瞿設定爲 STBY

（待機）模式0

2. [REC SEARCH -]

製，而 [REC SEARCH +] 播放，只要舅將個別按瞿持續按住0

■

若舅在 STBY 模式中按 [REC SEARCH -] 搜搜尋尋-））

（（錄錄製製搜搜尋尋-））

允許舅向後播放錄

（（錄錄製製搜搜尋尋+））

允許舅向前

（（錄錄製製

按瞿，舅的攝錄放影機將倒向播放 3 秒

鐘，然後自動返回原位0

附附註註

[

]

■

螢幕在錄製搜尋模式中時可能會顯示馬賽克狀的失眞0

■

在 REC SEARCH（錄製搜尋）之後按下

[Start/Stop]

（（開開始始/停停止止））

按瞿，將會覆寫該點後面

的已錄製影像0

（（關關閉閉））

（（開開始始/停停止止））

，然後回到 [CAMERA]0這項自動電源

按瞿或將 [Power]

（（電電源源））

3636

ENGLISH

Basic Recording

Searching a quickly for a desired scene (Setting the ZERO MEMORY) (SC-D364/D366 only)

✤ The ZERO MEMORY function works in both <Camera> and

<Player> modes. ➥page 19

✤ You can mark a point on a tape that you want to return to following

playback.

1. Set the [Power] switch to [CAMERA] or [PLAYER].

2. Set the [Mode] switch to [TAPE].

3. Press the [ZERO MEMORY] button on the remote control before the recording or during playback at the point where you wish to return.

■

The time code is changed to a tape counter that is set to ZERO MEMORY with the < 0:00:00> (ZERO MEMORY indicator).

■

If you want to cancel the ZERO MEMORY function, press the [ZERO MEMORY] button again.

4. Finding the zero position.

■

When you have finished playback, fast forward or rewind the tape in stop mode. The tape stops automatically when it reaches the zero position.

■

When you have finished recording, set the [Power] switch to [PLAYER] and press the

œœœœ

[

(REW)] button.

The tape stops automatically when it reaches the zero position.

5. The tape counter with the <>(ZERO MEMORY indicator) disappears from the display and the tape counter is changed to the time code.

[ Notes ]

■

In the following situations, ZERO MEMORY mode may be canceled

function.

automatically:

- At the end of the section marked with the ZERO MEMORY

- When the tape is ejected.

- When you remove the Battery Pack or power supply.

■

The ZERO MEMORY may not function correctly where there is a break between recordings on the tape.

（（僅僅限限

基基本本錄錄製製

快快速速搜搜尋尋所所要要的的場場景景（（設設定定零零記記憶憶））

SC-D364/D366

✤ 零記憶功能可在 <Camera> 和 <Player> 模式下操作0 ➥第 19 頁 ✤ 舅可以在錄影帶上標記舅要返回繼續播放的點0

1. 將 [Power]

2. 將 [Mode]

3. 在錄製前或播放期間，在舅要返回的點按遙控器上

4. 尋胥零位置0

5. 具有 < >（零記憶指示器）的錄影帶計時器將

附附註註

[

]

■

在下列情況下，零記憶模式可能自動取消：

- 在標記有零記憶功能部略的完結處0

- 當錄影帶被彈出時0

- 當舅取出電池組或移除電源時0

■

零記憶可能在錄影帶上的錄製具有間隔時無法正確發揮功能0

））

（（電電源源））

開關設定爲 [CAMERA] 或

（（播播放放機機））

[PLAYER]

的 [ZERO MEMORY]

■

時間代碼變成設定爲零記憶 < 0:00:00>

（零記憶指示器）的錄影帶計時器0

■

若舅要取消零記憶功能，請再次按

[ZERO MEMORY]

■

當舅完成播放時，在停止模式中快進或回轉錄影帶0 錄影帶將在到達零位置時自動停止0

■

當舅完成錄製時，將 [Power] [PLAYER]

œœœœ

[

(REW)]

錄影帶將在到達零位置時自動停止0

從顯示怜面消失，同時錄影帶計時器將變更至時間代碼0

（（模模式式））

開關設定爲 [TAPE]

（（播播放放機機））

（（œœœœ （（回回轉轉））））

（（零零記記憶憶））

，然後按下

按瞿0

（（錄錄影影帶帶））

（（電電源源））

開關設定爲

3737

ENGLISH

QUICK MENU

Basic Recording

Self Record using the Remote Control (Setting the Self Timer) (SC-D364/D366 only)

✤ The SELF TIMER function works only in <Camera> mode.

➥page 19

✤ When you use the SELF TIMER function on the remote control, the

recording begins automatically in 10 seconds.

1. Set the [Power] switch to [CAMERA].

2. Set the [Mode] switch to [TAPE].

3. Press the [SELF TIMER] button until the appropriate indicator is displayed.

4. Press the [Start/Stop] button to start the timer.

■

SELF TIMER starts counting down from 10 with a beep sound.

■

In the last one second of the countdown the beep sound gets faster, then recording starts automatically.

■

If you want to cancel the SELF TIMER function before recording, press the [SELF TIMER] button.

5. Press the [Start/Stop] button again when you wish to stop recording.

[ Notes ]

■

Do not obstruct the remote control sensor by putting obstacles between the remote control and Camcorder.

■

The remote control range is 4 ~5m (13 ~17 ft). The effective remote control angle is up to 30 degrees left /right from the center line. Using a tripod is recommended for delayed recording.

3838

4 5

基基本本錄錄製製

使使用用遙遙控控器器進進行行自自錄錄製製（（設設定定自自拍拍計計時時器器））

（（僅僅限限

SC-D364/D366

✤ 自拍計時器功能僅可在 <Camera> 模式下操作0 ➥第 19 頁 ✤ 當舅在遙控器上使用自拍計時器功能時，錄製將在 10 秒鐘後自動開

始0

1. 將 [Power]

2. 將 [Mode]

3. 按下 [SELF TIMER]

4. 按下 [Start/Stop]

5. 當舅要停止錄製時再次按 [Start/Stop]

附附註註

[

■

））

（（電電源源））

開關設定爲 [CAMERA]0

（（模模式式））

開關設定爲 [TAPE]

（（自自拍拍計計時時器器））

當的指示器0

■

自拍計時器將開始從 10 倒數，橙發出「榛」聲0

■

在倒數的最後一秒，「榛」聲將加快，然後錄製自動開始0

■

若舅要在錄製之前取消自拍計時器功能，請再次按下 [SELF TIMER]

（（開開始始/停停止止））

（（自自拍拍計計時時器器））

按瞿0

]

請勿在遙控器或攝錄放影機之間擺放障巫物以免阻隔遙控器感應鎖0 遙控器範圍介於 4 ~ 5 公尺（13 ~ 17 英樹）0 有效的遙控器角度介於中線左/右 30 度0 建議爲延遲錄製使用三苛架0

（（錄錄影影帶帶））

按瞿直至顯示適

按瞿以開始計時器0

按瞿0

（（開開始始/停停止止））

ENGLISH

COLOR NITE

LIGHT

MACRO

PB ZOOM

Basic Recording

Zooming In and Out

✤ The Zoom function works in both <Camera> and <M.Cam> modes.

➥page 19

✤ Zooming is a recording technique that lets you change the size of the

subject in a scene.

✤ You can zoom using variable zoom speeds. ✤ Use these features for different shots. Please note that over-use of the

Zoom feature can lead to unprofessional looking results and a reduction of battery usage time.

1. Move the [Zoom] lever slightly for a gradual zoom, move it further for a high-speed zoom.

■

Your zooming is monitored on the OSD.

2. [T] (Telephoto) side: Subject appears closer. [W] (Wide angle) side: Subject appears farther away.

■

You can record a subject that is about 10mm (about 0.5 inch) away from the lens surface in the Wide position.

Using the Tele Macro

✤ Tele Macro function works in both <Camera> and

<M.Cam> mode. ➥page 19

✤ Effective focal distance in Tele Macro mode is 50 Cm

(19.7 inches) ~ 100 Cm (39.4 inches).

1. Press the [MACRO/PB ZOOM] button.

■

Tele Macro ( ) icon is displayed.

2. If you want to cancel the Tele Macro function, press the

[MACRO/PB ZOOM] button again.

[ Notes ]

■

When recording in Tele Macro mode, the focus speed may be slow.

■

When you operate the Zoom function in the Tele Macro mode, the recording subject may be out of focus.

■

Use a tripod to prevent hand shake in the Tele Macro mode.

■

Avoid shadows when recording in the Tele Macro mode.

■

As the distance to the subject decreases, focusing area narrows.

■

When you can not get proper focus, use the [Zoom] lever.

TELE

WIDE

W T

STBY

基基本本錄錄製製

放放大大和和縮縮小小

✤ 縮放功能可在 <Camera> 和 <M.Cam> 模式下操作0 ➥第 19 頁

縮放是讓舅變更場景中主體大小的錄製技巧0

✤

舅可以使用不同的縮放速度來進行縮放0

✤

橙爲不同的拍攝使用這些功能0 請留意過度使用縮放功能可能導致不觀

✤

專業的視覺效果，橙縮短電池使用時間0

（（縮縮放放））

側：主體顯得較近0

按瞿0

桿以漸

按瞿0

（（縮縮放放））

3. [W]

■

使使用用望望遠遠微微距距

0:39:40

25min

1. 稍微移動 [Zoom]

次縮放，增大移動幅度則可進行高速縮放0

■

舅的縮放可在 OSD 上監控0

（（望望遠遠））

2. [T]

（（廣廣角角））

側：主體顯得較遠0

舅可在廣角位置錄製大約距透鏡表面 10 公釐（大約 0.5 英勝）的主體0

✤ 望遠微距功能可在 <Camera> 和 <M.Cam> 模式下操

作0 ➥第 19 頁

距模式下的有效焦距是 50 公分（19.7 英勝）~

✤ 望遠微

100 公分（39.4 英勝）0

1. 按下 [MACRO/PB ZOOM]

■

望遠微距 ( ) 圖示將會顯示0

2. 若舅要取消望遠微距功能，請再次按[MACRO/

附附註註

[

■

（（微微距距/播播放放縮縮放放））

PB ZOOM]

]

當在望遠微距模式中進行錄製時，對焦速度可能緩慢0 當舅在望遠微距模式下操作縮放功能時，錄製主體可能失焦0 在望遠微距模式中使用三苛架以避免手震動0 在望遠微距模式中進行錄製時避免陰影0 當與主體的距離縮短時，對焦區域也變窄0 當舅無法取得正確對焦時，請使用 [Zoom]

（（微微距距/播播放放縮縮放放））

桿0

3939

ENGLISH

Basic Recording

Using the Fade In and Out

✤ The Fade function works only in

<Camera> mode. ➥page 19

✤ You can give your recording a

professional look by using special effects such as fade in at the beginning of a sequence or fade out at the end of a sequence.

To Start Recording

1. Set the [Power] switch to [CAMERA].

2. Set the [Mode] switch to [TAPE]. (SC-D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

3. Before recording, press and hold the [FADE] button.

■

The picture and sound gradually disappear (fade out).

4. Press the [Start/Stop] button and at the same time release the [FADE] button.

■

Recording starts and the picture and sound gradually appear (fade in).

To Stop Recording (use Fade In/Fade Out)

5. When you wish to stop recording, press and hold the [FADE] button.

■

The picture and sound gradually disappear (fade out).

6. When the picture has disappeared, press the [Start/Stop] button to stop recording.

a. Fade Out

(Approx. 4 seconds)

b. Fade In

(Approx. 4 seconds)

4040

Press and hold the [FADE] button

Gradual appearance b. Fade In Release the [FADE] button

基基本本錄錄製製

使使用用淡淡入入和和淡淡出出

➔

√

➔

√

➔

STBY

REC

STBY

●

a. Fade Out Gradual disappearance

✤ 淡化功能僅可在 <Camera>模式下操

0:00:05

60min

作0 ➥第 19 頁

✤ 透過使用特殊效果，舅可使舅的錄製

看起來更專業，如在錄製順序開始時使用淡入或在順序結束時使用淡出0

開開始始錄錄製製

0:00:20

60min

1. 將 [Power]

2. 將 [Mode]

（（錄錄影影帶帶））

（（電電源源））

[CAMERA]0

（（模模式式））

0（僅限 SC-D363/D364/

D365/D366）

3. 錄製之前，請按住 [FADE]

0:00:25

60min

0:00:30

60min

按瞿0

■

怜面和音效漸漸消失（淡出）0

4. 按 [Start/Stop] 釋放 [FADE]

■

錄製開始，怜面及音效漸漸出現

（（開開始始/停停止止））

（（淡淡化化））

（淡入）0

要要停停止止錄錄製製（（使使用用淡淡入入/淡淡出出））

5. 當舅希望停止錄製時，請按住 [FADE]

（（淡淡化化））

按瞿0

■

怜面和音效漸漸消失（淡出）0

6. 在怜面消失後，按

[Start/Stop]

止止））

a. 淡出（大約 4 秒鐘）

b. 淡入（大約 4 秒鐘）

開關設定爲

開關設定爲 [TAPE]

（（淡淡化化））

按瞿，同時

按瞿0

（（開開始始/停停

按瞿以停止錄製0

ENGLISH

Basic Recording

Using Back Light Compensation Mode (BLC)

✤ BLC works in both <Camera> and <M.Cam>

modes. ➥page 19

✤ Back lighting exists when the subject is darker

than the background:

- The subject is in front of a window.

- The person to be recorded is wearing white or shiny clothes and is placed against a bright background; the person’s face is too dark to distinguish his/her features.

- The subject is outdoors and the background is overcast.

- The light sources are too bright.

- The subject is against a snowy background.

1. Set the [Power] switch to [CAMERA].

2. Set the [Mode] switch to [TAPE] or [MEMORY]. (SC-D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

3. Press the [QUICK MENU] button.

■

Quick menu list will appear.

4. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select BLC, then press the [OK] button.

5. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select On, then press the [OK] button.

6. To exit, press the [QUICK MENU] button.

■

BLC icon ( ) will be displayed.

[ Note ]

■

The BLC function will not operate in EASY.Q mode.

DIS

Program AE 16:9 Wide White Balance Shutter Exposure BLC

Q.MENU

Exit

DIS Program AE 16:9 Wide White Balance Shutter Exposure

BLC

Q.MENU

Exit

基基本本錄錄製製

使使用用背背光光補補償償模模式式

STBY

0:00:10

60min

Off

0:00:10

60min

…

†

0:00:10

60min

(BLC)

✤ BLC 功能可在 <Camera> 和 <M.Cam> 模式下

操作0 ➥第 19 頁

✤ 背光情形在主體比背景暗時發生：

- 主體位於鎖前0

- 將被錄製的人物穿著白色或亮色服飾，橙處

於明亮的背景中，該人物的漑龐將顯得太暗而無法辨別其五官0

- 主體在戶外，而背景陰暗0

- 光源太亮0

- 主體處於雪景中0

2. 將 [Mode]

3. 按下 [QUICK MENU]

4. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

5. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

6. 按 [QUICK MENU]

附附註註

[

■

（（電電源源））

將 [Power]

[MEMORY]

開關設定爲 [CAMERA]0

（（模模式式））

開關設定爲 [TAPE]

（（記記憶憶賓賓））

（僅限 SC-D363/D364/ D365/D366）

■

快速選單淸單將會顯示0

（（背背光光補補償償模模式式））

（（開開啓啓））

，然後按下 [OK]

（（快快速速選選單單））

■

BLC 圖示 ( ) 將會顯示0

（（快快速速選選單單））

（（縮縮放放））

（（確確定定））

按瞿0

桿以選擇 BLC

（（確確定定））

桿以選擇 On

按瞿0

按瞿以結束0

]

BLC 功能不可在簡易拍攝模式下操作0

（（錄錄影影帶帶））

按瞿0

或

4141

ENGLISH

COLOR NITE

LIG

LIGHT

COLOR NITE

Basic Recording

Using the COLOR NITE (COLOR NITE)

✤ COLOR NITE function works only in <Camera> mode. ➥page 19 ✤ You can take a shot of an object in slow motion by controlling the

shutter speed, or a brighter image in dark places without a compromise in colors.

1. Set the [Power] switch to [CAMERA].

2. Set the [Mode] switch to [TAPE]. (SC-D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

3. Press the [COLOR NITE] button.

4. Each time you press the [COLOR NITE] button, shutter speed is changed to;

√ <Color N. 1/30>, <Color N. 1/15> and <OFF> . √ <Color N. 1/30>, <Color N. 1/15>, <Color N.

1/15( )> and <OFF>.

[ Notes ]

■

The COLOR NITE will not turn on or off while you are recording.

■

When using the COLOR NITE, the image takes on a slow motion like effect.

■

When using the COLOR NITE, the focus adjusts slowly and the white dots may appear on the screen, this is not a defect.

■

COLOR NITE is not available while DIS, Photo image recording or EASY.Q is in use.

■

Digital Zoom, Photo image recording,16:9 Wide, Emboss2, Pastel2, Mirror or Mosaic is not available in the COLOR NITE mode.

■

If DIS or EASY.Q is set, COLOR NITE mode will be released.

4242

基基本本錄錄製製

使使用用色色彩彩夜夜拍拍（（色色彩彩夜夜拍拍））

✤ 色彩夜拍功能僅可在 <Camera> 模式下操作0 ➥第 19 頁 ✤ 透過控制快門速度或使暗地方的影像變亮，舅可以用慢動作的方式拍

攝物體，橙且不會降低色彩0

（（電電源源））

開關設定爲 [CAMERA]0

（（模模式式））

開關設定爲 [TAPE]

（（錄錄影影帶帶））

（僅限 SC-D363/D364/ D365/D366）

（（色色彩彩夜夜拍拍））

按瞿0

（（色色彩彩夜夜拍拍））

按瞿時，快

門速度將變更爲：

√ <Color N. 1/30> √ <Color N. 1/30>

<Color N. 1/15> 和 <OFF>0

1/15( )> 和 <OFF>0

]

當舅正在錄製時，色彩夜拍功能將不會開啓或關閉0 當使用色彩夜拍時，所錄製的影像將具有類似慢動作的效果0 在使用色彩夜拍功能時，對焦調整將變得緩慢，同時可能有白點出現在螢幕上，這不是故障所造成0 色彩夜拍不可在 DIS/ 相片影像錄製或使用簡易拍攝時使用0 數位縮放/ 相片影像錄製/ 16：9 寬螢幕/ 浮雕2/ 蠟筆2/ 鏡像或馬賽克不可在色彩夜拍模式中使用0 若設定 DIS 或簡易拍攝，色彩夜拍模式將被解除0

STBY

Color N.1/30

0:00:10

60min

1. 將 [Power]

2. 將 [Mode]

3. 按下 [COLOR NITE]

4. 每次當舅按 [COLOR NITE]

附附註註

[

■

<Color N.

ENGLISH

COLOR NITE

LIG

LIGHT

COLOR NITE

Basic Recording

Using the LIGHT (SC-D362/D364/D365/D366 only)

✤ LIGHT function works only in <Camera> mode. ➥page 19 ✤ The LIGHT enables you to record subjects in dark places without

sacrificing color.

✤ The LIGHT can be used with the COLOR NITE function only.

1. Set the [Power] switch to [CAMERA].

2. Set the [Mode] switch to [TAPE]. (SC-D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

3. Press the [LIGHT] button until <Color N. 1/15( )> appears.

[ Notes ]

■

The LIGHT will not turn on or off while you are recording.

■

The range of the LIGHT is limited. (up to 6.6ft (2m))

[ Danger ]

■

The LIGHT can become extremely hot.

■

Do not touch it while in operation or soon after turning it off, otherwise serious injury may result.

■

Do not place the Camcorder into the carrying case immediately after using the LIGHT, since it remains extremely hot for some time.

■

Do not use near flammable or explosive materials.

基基本本錄錄製製

使使用用燈燈光光（（僅僅限限

✤ 燈光功能僅可在 <Camera> 模式下操作0 ➥第 19 頁 ✤ 燈光功能可讓舅錄製在暗處的主體，橙且不降低色彩0 ✤ 燈光功能僅可用於色彩夜拍功能0

STBY

0:00:10

60min

Color N. 1/15

SC-D362/D364/ D365/D366

1. 將 [Power]

2. 將 [Mode] （僅限 SC-D363/D364/ D365/D366）

3. 按下 [LIGHT]

附附註註

[

■

（高達 6.6 英樹（2 公尺））

危危險險

[

■

（（電電源源））

開關設定爲 [CAMERA]0

（（模模式式

）開關設定爲 [TAPE]

（（燈燈光光））

按瞿直到顯示 <Color N. 1/15

( )>0

]

當舅正在錄製時，燈光功能將不會開啓或關閉0 燈光功能的範圍相當有限0

]

燈光將會過熱0 請勿在操作時或熄滅後馬上觸摸央，否則可能導致嚴重受傷0 請勿在使用燈光後立刻將攝錄放影機放入旭帶套中，因爲央在此時仍舊過熱0 請勿迲近易燃性或爆炸性材料0

））

（（錄錄影影帶帶））

4343

ENGLISH

Advanced Recording

Selecting the Record Mode & Audio Mode

✤ The Record Mode function works in both <Camera> and

<Player> (DV IN or AV IN (SC-D365/D366)) modes.

➥page 19

✤ This Camcorder records and plays back in SP (standard

play) mode and in LP (long play) mode.

- <SP> (standard play): This mode permits 60 minutes of recording time with a DVM60 tape.

- <LP> (long play): This mode permits 90 minutes of recording time with a DVM60 tape.

✤ The Audio Mode function works in both <Camera> and

<Player> modes. ➥page 19

✤ This Camcorder records sound in two ways. (12Bit, 16Bit)

- <12Bit>: You can record two 12Bit stereo sound tracks. The original stereo sound can be recorded onto the Main (Sound1) track. Additional stereo sound can be dubbed onto the Sub (Sound2) track.

- <16Bit>: You can record one high quality stereo sound using 16Bit recording mode. Audio dubbing is not possible when using this mode.

1. Set the [Power] switch to [CAMERA] or [PLAYER].

2. Set the [Mode] switch to [TAPE]. (SC-D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

3. Press the [MENU] button.

4. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select <Record>, then press the [OK] button.

5. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select <Rec Mode> or <Audio Mode>, then press the [OK] button.

6. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select desired record mode or audio mode, then press the [OK] button.

■

Record mode can be set to <SP> or <LP>.

■

Audio mode can be set to <12Bit> or <16Bit>.

7. To exit, press the [MENU] button. The selected icon is displayed.

■

When <12Bit> is selected, no <12Bit> indication is displayed.

[ Notes ]

■

We recommend that you use this Camcorder to play back any tapes recorded on this Camcorder. Playing back a tape recorded in other equipment may produce mosaic shaped distortion.

■

When you record a tape in SP and LP modes, or LP mode only, the playback picture may be distorted or the time code may not be written properly if there is a gap between scenes.

■

Record using SP mode for best picture and sound quality.

[ Caution ]

■

To edit audio on your camcorder, you must set 12Bit for the Audio Mode and SP for the Rec Mode.

4444

進進階階錄錄製製

選選擇擇錄錄製製模模式式和和聲聲訊訊模模式式

Camera Mode

√Record

Rec Mode Audio Mode WindCut Plus Real Stereo

Move Select Exit

Camera Mode

Back Rec Mode

Audio Mode WindCut Plus Real Stereo

Move Select Exit

Camera Mode

Back

Rec Mode

Audio Mode

WindCut Plus Real Stereo

Move Select Exit

STBY

√SP √12Bit √Off √Off

SP LP

12Bit 16Bit

MENUOKZOOM

0:00:10

✤ 錄製模式功能可在 <Camera>和 <Player>（DV IN 或 AV IN

(SC-D365/D366)）模式下操作0 ➥第 19 頁

✤ 此攝錄放影機可在 SP（標準播放）模式及 LP（長時間播放）模式

中進行錄製和播放0

- <SP>：此模式使用 DVM60 錄影帶可獲得 60 分鐘的錄製時

間0

- <LP>：此模式使用 DVM60 錄影帶可獲得 90 分鐘的錄製時

間0

✤ 聲訊模式功能可在 <Camera> 和 <Player> 模式下操作0

➥第 19 頁

✤ 此攝錄放影機以兩種方式錄製音效0（（12Bit

- <12Bit>：舅可以錄製兩首 12 位元的立體聲曲目0 原始立體聲可被錄製到主（音效 1）曲目0 附加的立體聲可被配到子（音效 2）曲目上0

- <16Bit>：舅可以使用 16 位元錄製模式來錄製一段高品質立體聲0 在使用此模式時不可能進行配音0

（（電電源源））

1. 將 [Power]

2. 將 [Mode]

3. 按下 [MENU] 按瞿0

4. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

5. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

6. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

7. 按 [MENU]

附附註註

[

■

60min

16Bit

■

注注意意

[

■

（（播播放放機機））

（僅限 SC-D363/D364/ D365/D366）

（（確確定定））

[OK]

<Audio Mode>，然後按下 [OK]

模式，然後按下 [OK]

■

錄製模式可被設定爲 <SP>

（（長長時時間間播播放放））

■

聲訊模式可被設定爲 <12Bit> 或 <16Bit>0

■

當選擇了 <12Bit> 時，螢幕上將沒有指示說明所選擇的是 <12Bit>0

]

我們建議舅使用本攝錄放影機來播放任何在本機上錄製的錄影帶0 播放其他設備所錄製的錄影帶將可能産生馬賽克狀失眞0 當舅在 SP 及 LP 模式，或僅 LP 模式中錄製錄影帶時，若場景之間有間隔，播放怜面可能會失眞或時間代碼可能不會正確寫入0 使用 SP 模式進行錄製以獲取最佳的怜面與音效品質0

]

若要編輯攝錄放影機上的聲訊，舅必須將聲訊模式設定爲 12Bit，橙將錄製模式設定爲 SP0

開關設定爲 [CAMERA]

（（模模式式））

開關設定爲 [TAPE]

（（縮縮放放））

按瞿0

（（選選單單））

桿以選擇 <Record>，然後按下

（（縮縮放放））

桿以選擇 <Rec Mode>或（（確確定定））

（（縮縮放放））

桿以選擇所要的錄製模式或聲訊

（（確確定定））

按瞿0

（（標標準準播播放放））

按瞿以結束0 選定的圖示將會顯示0

（（相相機機））

（（錄錄影影帶帶））

按瞿0

或 <LP>

16Bit）

或 [PLAYER]

ENGLISH

Advanced Recording

Cutting Off Wind Noise (WindCut Plus)

✤ The WindCut Plus function works in both <Camera> and <Player>

(Audio dubbing) modes. ➥page 19

✤ Use the WindCut Plus when recording in windy places such as the

beach or near buildings.

✤ The WindCut Plus function minimizes wind noise or other noise while

recording.

- When the WindCut Plus is on, some low pitched tones are eliminated along with the sound of the wind.

1. Set the [Power] switch to [CAMERA] or [PLAYER].

2. Set the [Mode] switch to [TAPE]. (SC-D363/D364/D365 only)

3. Press the [MENU] button.

4. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select <Record>, then press the [OK] button.

5. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select <WindCut Plus>, then press the [OK] button.

6. To activate the WindCut Plus function, move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select <On> or <Auto> then press the [OK] button.

■

<On>: Removes the low pitched wind noise.

■

<Auto>: Minimizes the wind noise while preserving the human voice.

7. To exit, press the [MENU] button.

■

WindCut Plus (<On> or <Auto> ) icon is displayed.

[ Notes ]

■

Make sure WindCut Plus is set to off when you want the microphone to be as sensitive as possible.

■

WindCut Plus function is not available in USB Streaming mode. (SC-D362/D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

Camera Mode

√Record

Rec Mode Audio Mode WindCut Plus Real Stereo

Camera Mode

Rec Mode Audio Mode

WindCut Plus

Real Stereo

進進階階錄錄製製

消消除除風風聲聲

✤ 消除風聲功能可在 <Camera> 和 <Player> 模式下操作0 ➥第 19 頁 ✤ 在沙灘或迲近建築物等有風吹的地方錄製時使用消除風聲功能0 ✤ 消除風聲功能可在錄製時減低風聲或其他筮音0

Move Select Exit

Back

Move Select Exit

STBY

(WindCut Plus)

- 當開啓消除風聲時，一些低諶音調將和風聲一起被消除0

√SP √12Bit √Off √Off

1. 將 [Power]

2. 將 [Mode] （僅限 SC-D363/D364/ D365）

[PLAYER]

（（電電源源））

開關設定爲 [CAMERA] 或

（（播播放放機機））

（（模模式式））

開關設定爲 [TAPE]

3. 按下 [MENU] 按瞿0

Off On Auto

MENUOKZOOM

0:00:10

4. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

<Record>，然後按下 [OK]

5. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

<WindCut Plus>，然後按下 [OK]

6. 若要啓動消除風聲功能，請向上或向下移動

（（縮縮放放））

[Zoom]

（（確確定定））

下 [OK]

■

<On>：此功能可消除低諶音調的風聲0

■

<Auto>：

7. 按 [MENU]

60min

（（選選單單））

■

消除風聲 (<On> 或 <Auto> ) 圖示將會顯示0

（（縮縮放放））

桿以選擇

（（確確定定））

按瞿0

（（縮縮放放））

桿以選擇

（（確確定定））

桿以選擇 <On> 或 <Auto>，然後按

按瞿0

保留聲音同時減低風聲0

按瞿以結束0

附附註註

[

]

■

當舅希望麥克風的收音能細量敏感時，確保將消除風聲設定爲關閉0

■

消除風聲功能不可在 USB 串流模式中使用0

（僅限 SC-D362/D363/D364/D365/D366）

（（錄錄影影帶帶））

按瞿0

4545

ENGLISH

Advanced Recording

Selecting the Real Stereo Function

✤ The Real Stereo function works only in <Camera>

mode. ➥page 19

✤ Real Stereo enhances the left and right input signals

when using the Internal or External MICs.

1. Set the [Power] switch to [CAMERA].

2. Set the [Mode] switch to [TAPE]. (SC-D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

3. Press the [MENU] button.

4. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select <Record>, then press the [OK] button.

5. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select <Real Stereo>, then press the [OK] button.

6. To activate the Real Stereo function, move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select <On>, then press the [OK] button.

7. To exit, press the [MENU] button.

■

Real Stereo ( ) icon is displayed.

[ Note ]

■

To enjoy more stereo sound, use the stereo type

speakers.

4646

進進階階錄錄製製

選選擇擇逼逼眞眞立立體體聲聲功功能能

Camera Mode

√Record

Rec Mode Audio Mode WindCut Plus Real Stereo

Move Select Exit

Camera Mode

Back

Rec Mode Audio Mode WindCut Plus

Real Stereo

Move Select Exit

STBY

√SP √12Bit √Off √Off

Off On

MENUOKZOOM

✤ 逼眞立體聲功能僅可在 <Camera> 模式下操作0

➥第 19 頁

✤ 逼眞立體聲功能可在使用內建或外接式麥克風時增

强左右輸入訊號0

[PLAYER]

（（電電源源））

開關設定爲 [CAMERA] 或

（（播播放放機機））

（（模模式式））

開關設定爲 [TAPE]

1. 將 [Power]

2. 將 [Mode] （僅限 SC-D363/D364/ D365/D366）

3. 按下 [MENU] 按瞿0

4. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

（（縮縮放放））

桿以選擇

<Record>，然後按下 [OK]（確定）按瞿0

5. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

<Real Stereo>，然後按下 [OK]

（（縮縮放放））

桿以選擇（（確確定定））

6. 若要啓動逼眞立體聲功能，請向上或向下移動

（（縮縮放放））

0:00:10

60min

[Zoom]

（（確確定定））

7. 按 [MENU]

■

逼眞立體聲 ( ) 圖示將會顯示0

附附註註

[

■

若要享受更多的立體聲音響，請使用立體聲類型的

桿以選擇 <On>，然後按下 [OK]

按瞿0

（（選選單單））

按瞿以結束0

]

喇叭0

（（錄錄影影帶帶））

按瞿0

ENGLISH

Advanced Recording

Setting the Shutter Speed & Exposure

✤ The Shutter Speed function works only in <Camera> mode. ➥page 19 ✤ The Exposure function works in both <Camera> and <M.Cam> modes.

➥page 19

✤ The Shutter Speed and Exposure functions can be set in the QUICK

MENU.

1. Set the [Power] switch to [CAMERA].

2. Set the [Mode] switch to [TAPE]. (SC-D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

3. Press the [QUICK MENU] button.

■

Quick menu list will appear.

4. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select <Shutter> or <Exposure>, then press the [OK] button.

5. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select <Manual>, then press the [OK] button.

6. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select desired shutter speed or exposure, then press the [OK] button.

■

Shutter speed can be set to <1/60>, <1/100>, <1/250>, <1/500>, <1/1000>, <1/2000>, <1/4000> or <1/10000>.

■

Exposure value can be set between <00> and <29>.

7. To exit, press the [QUICK MENU] button.

■

Selected settings are displayed.

Recommended Shutter Speeds when Recording ✤ Outdoor sports such as golf or tennis: <1/2000> or

<1/4000>

✤ Moving cars or trains or other rapidly moving vehicles

such as roller coasters: <1/1000>, <1/500> or

<1/250>

✤ Indoor sports such as basketball: <1/120>

[ Notes ]

■

If you manually change the Shutter Speed and the Exposure value when Program AE option is selected, manual changes are applied first.

■

The image may not seem as smooth when a high Shutter Speed is set.

■

The Camcorder returns to the auto shutter and auto exposure settings when you change to the EASY.Q mode.

■

When recording with a Shutter Speed of 1/1000 or higher, make sure the sun is not shining into the lens.

DIS

Program AE 16:9 Wide White Balance Shutter Exposure BLC

Q.MENU

Exit

DIS Program AE 16:9 Wide White Balance

Shutter

Exposure BLC

Q.MENU

Exit

S. 1/60

[29]

†

進進階階錄錄製製

設設定定快快門門速速度度和和曝曝光光

✤ 快門速度功能僅可在 <Camera> 模式下操作0 ➥第 19 頁 ✤

曝光功能可在 <Camera> 和 <M.Cam> 模式下操作0➥第 19 頁

✤

快門速度和曝光功能可在快速選單中設定0

STBY

Off

Manual

1. 將 [Power]

2. 將 [Mode]

0:00:10

60min

3. 按下 [QUICK MENU]

4. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

5. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

6. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

0:00:10

60min

…

†

7. 按 [QUICK MENU]

錄錄製製時時建建議議使使用用的的快快門門速速度度

✤ 高爾夫或網球等戶外運動： <1/2000> 或 <1/4000> ✤

…

✤

[

■

（（電電源源））

開關設定爲 [CAMERA]0

（（模模式式））

（僅限 SC-D363/D364/ D365/D366）

■

快速選單淸單將會顯示0

或 <Exposure>，然後按下 [OK]

然後按下 [OK]

度或曝光，然後按下 [OK]

■

快門速度可設定爲 <1/60> <1/500> <1/10000>0

■

曝光値可設定在 <00> 和 <29> 之間0

■

會顯示所選擇的設定0

移動的汽車或火車或其他快速移動的車子，如雲鱗飛

車： <1/1000>

籃球等室內運動： <1/120>

附附註註

]

若舅在選擇了 Program AE（程序自動曝光）選項時手動變更快門速度和曝光値，手動變更將被首先套用0 當設定了蜈高的快門速度時，影像可能顯得較不柔和0 攝錄放影機將在舅變更至簡易拍攝模式時返回自動快門和自動曝光設定0 當以 1/1000 或以上的快門速度進行錄製時，確保陽光沒有照進透鏡內0

開關設定爲 [TAPE]

（（快快速速選選單單））

（（縮縮放放））

（（確確定定））

按瞿0

<1/1000>

（（快快速速選選單單））

<1/500> 或 <1/250>

（（縮縮放放））

（（確確定定））

（（錄錄影影帶帶））

按瞿0

桿以選擇 <Shutter>

（（確確定定））

按瞿0

桿以選擇 <Manual>，

桿以選擇所要的快門速

按瞿0

<1/100>

<1/2000>

<1/4000>

按瞿以結束0

<1/250>

或或

4747

ENGLISH

COLOR NITE

MF/AF

Advanced Recording

Auto Focus / Manual Focus

✤ The Auto Focus/Manual Focus function works

in both <Camera> and <M.Cam> modes.

➥page 19

✤ In most situations, it is better to use the

automatic focus feature, as it enables you to concentrate on the creative side of your recording.

✤ Manual focusing may be necessary under

certain conditions that make automatic focusing difficult or unreliable.

Auto Focus

✤ If you are inexperienced in the use of

Camcorders, we recommend that you make use of Auto Focus.

Manual Focus

✤ In the following situations, you may obtain better

results by adjusting the focus manually.

a. A picture containing several objects, some close to

the Camcorder, others further away. b. A person enveloped in fog or surrounded by snow. c. Very shiny or glossy surfaces like a car. d. People or objects moving constantly or quickly like

an athlete or a crowd.

1. Set the [Power] switch to [CAMERA].

2. Set the [Mode] switch to [TAPE] or [MEMORY].

(SC-D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

3. Press the [MF/AF] button.

■

The [MF] icon and the [MF/AF] status bar will be displayed on the LCD.

4. Focus with the [REV(

[ Note ]

Manual Focus is not available in the EASY.Q mode.

4848

œœœœ

)] and [FWD(

√√√√

)] buttons.

進進階階錄錄製製

自自動動對對焦焦/手手動動對對焦焦

STBY

0:00:10

60min

✤ 自動對焦/手動對焦功能可在 <Camera> 和

<M.Cam> 模式下操作0 ➥第 19 頁

✤ 在大多數情況下，使用自動對焦功能更爲恰

當，因爲央允許舅專注於創意錄製0

✤ 當在特定條件下無法進行自動對焦和/或自動

對焦變得不可迲時，可能就需要使用手動對焦0

自自動動對對焦焦

✤ 若舅沒有使用攝錄放影機的經驗，我們建議舅

充分利用自動對焦0

手手動動對對焦焦

✤ 在以下情況中，透過手動調整焦距將可讓舅獲

得更佳效果0

a. 圖片包含數個物體，各與攝錄放影機有不同距

離0

b. 被霧包圍或雪景中的人物0 c. 非常閃亮的表面，如汽車0 d. 持續或快速移動的人物或物體，如運動員或人

群0

1. 將 [Power]

（（電電源源））

2. 將 [Mode]

[MEMORY]

開關設定爲 [CAMERA]

（（模模式式））

開關設定爲 [TAPE]

（（記記憶憶賓賓））

（（相相機機））

（（錄錄影影帶帶））

（僅限 SC-D363/D364/ D365/D366）

3. 按 [MF/AF]

（（手手動動對對焦焦/自自動動對對焦焦））

■

[MF]（手動對焦）圖示和 [MF/AF]（手動對焦/自動

按瞿0

對焦）狀態列將會顯示在 LCD 上0

4. 使用 [REV( （（前前進進( √√√√)））

附附註註

[

]

œœœœ)]（（倒倒退退(œœœœ)））

按瞿來對焦0

和 [FWD(

√√√√

手動對焦不可在簡易拍攝模式中使用

或

)]

ENGLISH

Advanced Recording

Programed Automatic Exposure Modes (Program AE)

✤ The Program AE function works only in <Camera> mode. ➥page 19 ✤ The Program AE mode allows you to adjust shutter speeds and

apertures to suit different recording conditions.

✤ They give you creative control over the depth of field.

■

<Auto ( )> mode

- Auto balance between the subject and the background.

- To be used in normal conditions.

■

<Sports ( )> mode

For recording people or objects moving quickly.

■

<Portrait ()> mode

- For focusing on the background of the subject, when the background is out of focus.

- The Portrait mode is most effective when used outdoors.

■

<Spotlight ( )> mode

For recording correctly when there is only light on the subject and not the rest of the picture.

■

<Sand/Snow ( )> mode

For recording when people or objects are darker than the background because of reflected light from sand or snow.

■

<High Speed ( )> (High Shutter Speed) mode

For recording fast-moving subjects such as players in golf or tennis games.

STBY

進進階階錄錄製製

程程序序自自動動曝曝光光模模式式

✤ 程序自動曝光模式功能僅可在 <Camera> 模式下操作0 ➥第 19 頁 ✤ 程序自動曝光模式允許舅根據不同的錄製條件來調整快門速度和光圈0 ✤ 央們使舅可對景深進行具創意的控制0

0:00:10

60min

■

在除了主體，怜面中其他地方都沒有燈光時進行正確錄製0

■

在由於沙灘或雪地上光線反射，造成人物或物體比背景暗時進行錄製0

■

用於錄製快速移動的主體，如高爾夫或網球比賽中的選手0

(Program AE)

■

模模式式

- 自動平衡主體和背景0

- 在正常情況下使用0

模模式式

用於錄製快速移動的人物或物體0

模模式式

- 在主體的背景失焦時，對背景進行對焦0

- 人像模式在戶外使用時最有效0

模模式式

4949

ENGLISH

Advanced Recording

Setting the Program AE

1. Set the [Power] switch to [CAMERA].

2. Set the [Mode] switch to [TAPE]. (SC-D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

3. Press the [MENU] button.

■

The menu list will appear.

4. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select <Camera>, then press the [OK] button.

5. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select <Program AE>, then press the [OK] button.

■

The available options are listed.

6. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select desired program AE option, then press the [OK] button.

7. To exit, press the [MENU] button.

■

The icon of the selected mode is displayed.

■

When the <Auto> mode is selected, no icon is displayed.

[ Notes ]

■

Direct accessing the Program AE function is available simply using the [QUICK MENU] button. ➥page 20

■

The Program AE function will not operate in EASY.Q mode.

進進階階錄錄製製

Camera Mode

√Camera

Program AE White Balance Visual Effect 16:9 Wide DIS Digital Zoom

Camera Mode

Back Program AE

White Balance Visual Effect 16:9 Wide DIS Digital Zoom

√Auto √Auto √Off √Off √Off √Off

Move Select Exit

Auto Sports Portrait Spotlight Sand/Snow

STBY

High Speed

Move Select Exit

MENUOKZOOM

設設定定程程序序自自動動曝曝光光

1. 將 [Power]

2. 將 [Mode] （僅限 SC-D363/D364/ D365/D366）

3. 按下 [MENU] 按瞿0

■

4. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

<Camera>，然後按下 [OK]

5. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

<Program AE>，然後按下 [OK]

■

6. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

序自動曝光選項，然後按下 [OK]

7. 按 [MENU]

0:00:10

60min

■

附附註註

[

■

只需使用 [QUICK MENU] 存取程序自動曝光功能0 ➥第 20 頁

■

程序自動曝光功能不可在簡易拍攝模式下操作0

（（電電源源））

開關設定爲 [CAMERA]0

（（模模式式））

開關設定爲 [TAPE]

（（錄錄影影帶帶））

選單淸單將會顯示0

（（縮縮放放

）桿以選擇

（（確確定定））

按瞿0

（（縮縮放放））

桿以選擇

（（確確定定））

可用的選項將會列出0

（（縮縮放放））

（（選選單單））

選定模式的圖示將會顯示0

按瞿以結束0

按瞿0

桿以選擇所要的程

（（確確定定））

按瞿0

當選擇了<Auto> 模式時，將不會顯示任何圖示0

]

（（快快速速選選單單））

按瞿就可直接

5050

ENGLISH

Advanced Recording

進進階階錄錄製製

Setting the White Balance

✤ The White Balance function works in both <Camera> and <M.Cam> modes. (SC-

D363/D364/D365/D366 only) ➥page 19

✤ The White Balance is a recording function that preserves the unique image color of the

object in any recording condition.

✤ You may select the appropriate White Balance mode to obtain good quality image color.

■

<Auto ( )> : This mode is generally used to control the

White Balance automatically.

■

<Indoor ( )> : This controls the White Balance according to the indoor ambience.

- Under halogen or studio/video lighting

- Subject is of one dominant color

- Close up

■

<Outdoor ( )> : This controls the White Balance according to the outdoor ambience.

- In daylight, especially for close up and where the subject is of one dominant color.

■

<Custom WB ( )> : You can adjust the white balance as you wish based on the shooting environment.

1. Set the [Power] switch to [CAMERA].

2. Set the [Mode] switch to [TAPE] or [MEMORY]. (SC-D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

3. Press the [MENU] button.

■

The menu list will appear.

4. Move the [Zoom] lever to the up or down to select <Camera>, then press the [OK] button.

5. Move the [Zoom] lever to the up or down to select <White Balance>, then press the [OK] button.

6. Move the [Zoom] lever to the up or down to select desired mode (Auto, Indoor, Outdoor or Custom WB), then press the [OK] button.

■

To explain about the Custom WB:

- Select Custom WB and press the OK button. (“set

- Place the white object under the desired lighting then

7. To exit, press the [MENU] button.

■

When the <Auto> mode is selected, no icon is displayed.

[ Notes ]

■

Direct accessing the White Balance function is available simply using the [QUICK MENU] button. ➥page 20

■

The White Balance function will not operate in EASY.Q mode.

■

Turn the Digital Zoom off (if necessary) to set a more accurate white balance.

■

Reset the white balance if lighting conditions change.

■

During normal outdoor recording, setting to Auto may provide better results.

■

Buttons other than EASYQ, [MENU] and [OK] will not work during setting the Custom WB.

■

Pressing the [MENU] button while setting the Custom WB will cancel the Custom WB setting and sets the White Balance to Auto.

white balance” will appear and blinks on the screen.)

press the OK button. (The OSD will disappear and the Custom WB icon ( )

will be displayed.)

設設定定白白平平衡衡

✤ 白平衡功能可在 <Camera> 和 <M.Cam> 模式下操作0

（僅限 SC-D363/D364/ D365/D366）

✤ 白平衡是在任何錄製條件下保持物體獨特影像顔色的錄製功能0 ✤ 舅可選擇適當的白平衡模式以取得品質優良的影像顔色0

Camera Mode

√Camera

Program AE White Balance Visual Effect 16:9 Wide DIS Digital Zoom

Move Select Exit

Camera Mode

Back

Program AE

White Balance

Visual Effect 16:9 Wide DIS Digital Zoom

Move Select Exit

√Auto √Auto √Off √Off √Off √Off

MENUOKZOOM

Auto Indoor Outdoor Custom WB

MENUOKZOOM

STBY

0:00:10

60min

■

在設定自訂白平衡時按下 [MENU] 橙將白平衡設定爲自動0

1. 將 [Power]

2. 將 [Mode]

3. 按下 [MENU] 按瞿0

4. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

5. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

6. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

7. 按 [MENU]

[

■

➥第 19 頁

■

<Auto ( )>：此模式一般用來自動控制白平衡0

■

<Indoor ( )>：這將根據室內環境控制白平衡0

- 在鹵光燈或影棚/錄影燈光下

- 主體顔色突出

- 特寫

■

<Outdoor ( )>：這將根據戶外環境控制白平衡0

■

在陽光下，尤其爲顔色突出的主體拍攝特寫時0

■

<Custom WB ( )>：舅可以根據拍攝環境調整舅要的白平衡0

（（記記憶憶賓賓））

■

選單淸單將會顯示0

按下 [OK]

<White Balance>，然後按下 [OK]

（（自自動動））

/ Indoor

（（自自訂訂白白平平衡衡））））

■

若要獲得有關自訂白平衡的說明：

- 選擇 Custom WB，然後按下 OK（確定）按瞿0（”設定

白平衡」” 將會顯示，橙且”設定白平衡”會在螢幕上閃鹵顯示0）

- 將白色物體置於所要的燈光下，然後按下 OK（確定）

按瞿0（OSD 將會消失，而自訂白平衡圖示 ( ) 則會顯示0）

■

當選擇了 <Auto> 模式時，將不會顯示任何圖示0

附附註註

]

舅可以使用 [QUICK MENU] 功能0 ➥第 20 頁白平衡功能不可在簡易拍攝模式下操作0 關閉數位縮放（如有必要）以設定更準確的白平衡0 在燈光條件變更時重設白平衡0 在進行普通戶外錄製期間，設定爲自動將可提供更佳效果0

EASYQ/ [MENU]

自訂白平衡期間都將無法操作0

（（電電源源））

開關設定爲 [CAMERA]0

（（模模式式））

開關設定爲 [TAPE]

0（僅限 SC-D363/D364/ D365/D366）

（（確確定定））

按瞿0

（（室室內內）），然後按下 [OK]

（（選選單單））

按瞿以結束0

（（選選單單））

按瞿將會取消自訂白平衡設定，

（（錄錄影影帶帶））

（（縮縮放放））

桿以選擇 <Camera>，然後

（（縮縮放放））

桿以選擇

（（確確定定））

（（縮縮放放））

桿以選擇所要的模式（（Auto （（戶戶外外））

/ Outdoor

（（確確定定））

按瞿0

（（快快速速選選單單））

（（確確定定））

和 [OK]

之外的按瞿，在設定

按瞿0

或 Custom WB

按瞿直接存取白平衡

或 [MEMORY]

5151

ENGLISH

Advanced Recording

Applying Visual Effects

✤ The Visual Effect function works only in <Camera> mode. ➥page 19 ✤ The Visual Effects enable you to give a creative look to your

recording.

✤ Select the appropriate Visual Effect for the type

of picture that you wish to record and the effect you wish to create. There are 10 Visual Effect modes.

1. <Art> mode

This mode gives the images a coarse effect.

2. <Mosaic> mode

This mode gives the images a mosaic effect.

3. <Sepia> mode

This mode gives the images a reddish-brown pigment.

4. <Negative> mode

This mode reverses the colors, creating a negative image.

5. <Mirror> mode

This mode cuts the picture in half, using a mirror effect.

6. <BLK&WHT> mode

This mode changes the images to black and white.

7. <Emboss1> mode

This mode creates a 3D effect (embossing).

8. <Emboss2> mode

This mode creates a 3D effect (embossing) on surrounding area of an image.

9. <Pastel1> mode

This mode applies a pale pastel drawing effect to an image.

10.<Pastel2> mode

This mode applies a pale pastel drawing effect to surrounding area of an image.

1 2

3 4

5 6

7 8

9 10

進進階階錄錄製製

套套用用視視訊訊效效果果

✤ 視訊效果功能僅可在 <Camera> 模式下操作0 ➥第 19 頁 ✤ 視訊效果讓舅可以在錄製中加入創意元素0

✤ 爲舅要錄製的圖片類型以及舅要建立的效果選

擇適當的視訊效果0 共有 10 種視訊效果模式0

模模式式

1. <Art>

此模式可賦予影像粗鼠效果0

2. <Mosaic>

3. <Sepia>

4. <Negative>

5. <Mirror>

6. <BLK&WHT>

7. <Emboss1>

8. <Emboss2>

9. <Pastel1>

10. <Pastel2>

模模式式

此模式可賦予影像馬賽克效果0

模模式式

此模式可賦予影像紅褐色的色調0

模模式式

此模式把顔色倒置，建立一張底片影像0

模模式式

此模式使用鏡像效果，將圖片剪切一半0

模模式式

此模式將影像變更爲黑白0

模模式式

此模式將建立 3D 效果（浮雕）0

模模式式

此模式在影像周圍區域建立 3D 效果（浮雕）0

模模式式

此模式將淡淡的蠟筆繪怜效果套用到影像上0

模模式式

此模式將淡淡的蠟筆繪怜效果套用到影像的周圍區域上0

5252

ENGLISH

Advanced Recording

Selecting the Visual Effects

1. Set the [Power] switch to [CAMERA].

2. Set the [Mode] switch to [TAPE]. (SC-D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

3. Press the [MENU] button.

■

The menu list will appear.

4. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select <Camera>, then press the [OK] button.

5. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select <Visual Effect>, then press the [OK] button.

6. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select the desired Visual Effect option, then press the [OK] button.

■

The display mode is set to the selected mode.

7. To exit, press the [MENU] button.

[ Notes ]

■

The Pastel2, Emboss2, Mirror or Mosaic mode is not available while DIS or COLOR NITE is in use.

■

Visual Effect modes are not available while EASY.Q is in use.

■

Once DIS, EASY.Q, or COLOR NITE is set, Emboss2, Pastel2, Mirror or Mosaic mode will be released.

■

Emboss2, Pastel2, Mirror or Mosaic mode is not available in the 16:9 Wide mode.(SC-D263/D362/D363/D364 only)

■

Digital Zoom is not available in the Emboss2, Pastel2, Mirror or Mosaic mode.

■

Visual Effect modes other than Emboss2, Pastel2, Mirror or Mosaic mode is available while DIS is in use.

Camera Mode

√Camera

Program AE White Balance Visual Effect 16:9 Wide DIS Digital Zoom

Move Select Exit

Camera Mode

Back

Program AE White Balance

Visual Effect

16:9 Wide DIS Digital Zoom

Move Select Exit

AArrtt

進進階階錄錄製製

√Auto √Auto √Off √Off √Off √Off

MENUOKZOOM

Off Art Mosaic Sepia Negative Mirror

▼

MENUOKZOOM

STBY

選選擇擇視視訊訊效效果果

1. 將 [Power]

2. 將 [Mode] （僅限 SC-D363/D364/ D365/D366）

3. 按下 [MENU] 按瞿0

■

4. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

<Camera>，然後按下 [OK]

5. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

<Visual Effect>，然後按下 [OK]

6. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

訊效果選項，然後按下 [OK]

■

7. 按 [MENU]

0:00:10

60min

附附註註

[

■

蠟筆2/ 浮雕2/ 鏡像或馬賽克不可在 DIS 或色彩夜拍模式中使用0

■

視訊效果模式在簡易拍攝模式中不可使用0

■

一旦設定了 DIS/ 簡易拍攝或色彩夜拍/浮雕2/蠟筆2/ 鏡像或馬賽克模式將被解除0

■

浮雕2/ 蠟筆2/ 鏡像或馬賽克模式不可在 16:9 寬螢幕模式中使用0

（僅限 SC-D263/D362/D363/D364）

■

數位縮放不可在蠟筆2/ 浮雕2/ 鏡像或馬賽克模式中使用0

■

除了蠟筆2/ 浮雕2/ 鏡像或馬賽克模式以外的視訊效果模式可在 DIS 模式中使用0

（（電電源源））

開關設定爲 [CAMERA]0

（（模模式式））

開關設定爲 [TAPE]

（（錄錄影影帶帶））

選單淸單將會顯示0

（（縮縮放放））

桿以選擇

（（確確定定））

按瞿0

（（縮縮放放））

桿以選擇

（（確確定定））

（（縮縮放放））

桿以選擇所要的視

（（確確定定））

顯示模式將被設定爲所選擇的模式0

（（選選單單））

按瞿以結束0

按瞿0

]

按瞿0

5353

ENGLISH

Advanced Recording

Setting the 16:9 Wide mode

✤ The 16:9 Wide function works only in <Camera>

mode. ➥page 19

✤ Select to record a picture to be played back on a 16:9

Wide TV.

✤ Recordings in 16:9 Wide will play back naturally

only when the TV supports 16:9 aspect ratio.

1. Set the [Power] switch to [CAMERA].

2. Set the [Mode] switch to [TAPE]. (SC-D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

3. Press the [MENU] button.

■

The menu list will appear.

4. Move the [Zoom] lever to the up or down to select <Camera>, then press the [OK] button.

5. Move the [Zoom] lever to the up or down to select <16:9 Wide>, then press the [OK] button.

6. To activate the 16:9 Wide function, move the [Zoom] lever to the up or down to select <On>, then press the [OK] button.

■

If you do not want to use the 16:9 Wide function, set the <16:9 Wide> menu to <Off>.

7. To exit, press the [MENU] button. The selected icon is displayed.

[ Notes ]

■

You can directly access the 16:9 Wide function using the [QUICK MENU] button.

➥page 20

■

The 16:9 Wide mode is not available while Visual Effect, DIS or EASY. Q is in use.(SC-D263/D362/ D363/D364 only)

■

Once COLOR NITE is set, 16:9 Wide mode will be released.

■

Digital Zoom is not available in the 16:9 Wide mode.

■

Still image recording is not available in the 16:9 Wide mode.

5454

1166 ::99 WWiiddee

進進階階錄錄製製

設設定定

Camera Mode

√Camera

Program AE White Balance Visual Effect 16:9 Wide DIS Digital Zoom

Move Select Exit

Camera Mode

Back

Program AE White Balance Visual Effect

16:9 Wide

DIS

Digital Zoom

Move Select Exit

STBY

√Auto √Auto √Off √Off √Off √Off

Off On

16:9

MENUOKZOOM

0:00:10

60min

0:00:10

60min

寬寬螢螢幕幕模模式式

✤ 16:9 寬螢幕功能僅可在 <Camera> 模式下操作0

➥第 19 頁

✤ 選擇此項以錄製要在 16：9 的寬螢幕電視機上播放

的怜面0

✤ 以 16:9 寬螢幕錄製只能在電視機支援 16:9 長寬比

時播放才會顯得自然0

1. 將 [Power]

2. 將 [Mode]

3. 按下 [MENU] 按瞿0

4. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

5. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

6. 若要啓動 16:9 寬螢幕功能，請向上或向下移動

7. 按 [MENU]

附附註註

[

■ 舅可以使用 [QUICK MENU]

■ 16:9 寬螢幕模式在視訊效果/DIS 或簡易拍攝中不

■ 一旦設定了色彩夜拍/16:9 寬螢幕模式將被解除0

■ 數位縮放不可在 16：9 寬螢幕模式中使用0

■ 不可在 16：9 寬螢幕模式中進行靜止影像錄製0

（（電電源源））

開關設定爲 [CAMERA]0

（（模模式式））

開關設定爲 [TAPE]

（（錄錄影影帶帶））

（僅限 SC-D363/D364/ D365/D366）

■

選單淸單將會顯示0

（（縮縮放放））

桿以選擇

<Camera> ，然後按下 [OK]

<16:9 Wide> ，然後按下 [OK]

（（縮縮放放））

[Zoom]

（（確確定定））

■

若舅不希望使用 16:9 寬螢幕功能，請將

桿以選擇 <On>，然後按下 [OK]

按瞿0

（（確確定定））

（（縮縮放放））

（（確確定定））

按瞿0

桿以選擇

按瞿0

<16:9 Wide> 選單設定爲 <Off>0

（（選選單單））

按瞿以結束0 選定的圖示將會顯

示0

]

（（快快速速選選單單））

按瞿直接存

取 16:9 寬螢幕功能0 ➥第 20 頁

可使用0 （僅限 SC-D263/D362/D363/D364）

ENGLISH

Advanced Recording

Setting the Digital Image Stabilizer (DIS)

✤ The DIS function works only in <Camera> mode. ➥page 19 ✤ DIS (Digital Image Stabilizer) is a function that compensates for any

shaking or hand movement while holding the Camcorder (within reasonable limits).

✤ It provides more stable pictures when:

- Recording with the zoom (DIS is not available in Digital Zoom mode.)

- Recording a small object close-up

- Recording and walking at the same time

- Recording through the window of a vehicle

1. Set the [Power] switch to [CAMERA].

2. Set the [Mode] switch to [TAPE]. (SC-D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

3. Press the [MENU] button.

■

The menu list will appear.

4. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select <Camera>, then press the [OK] button.

5. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select <DIS>, then press the [OK] button.

6. To activate the DIS function, move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select <On>, then press the [OK] button.

■

If you do not want to use the DIS function, set the <DIS> menu to <Off>.

7. To exit, press the [MENU] button.

■

DIS ( ) icon is displayed.

[ Notes ]

■

You can directly access the DIS function using the [QUICK MENU]. ➥page 20

■

Digital Zoom, COLOR NITE, Emboss2, Pastel2, Mirror or Mosaic is not available in the DIS mode.

■

16:9 Wide mode is not available in the DIS mode.(SC-D263/D362/D363/D364 only)

■

When you press the [PHOTO] button while the DIS function is enabled, the DIS will be released shortly and resume automatically after the still image recording.

■

It is recommended that you deactivate the DIS function when using a tripod.

■

If you use the DIS function, the picture quality may deteriorate.

■

EASY.Q mode automatically sets the <DIS> to <On>.

Camera Mode

√Camera

Program AE White Balance Visual Effect 16:9 Wide DIS Digital Zoom

Move Select Exit

Camera Mode

Back

Program AE White Balance Visual Effect

16:9 Wide

DIS

Digital Zoom

Move Select Exit

STBY

進進階階錄錄製製

設設定定數數位位防防手手震震功功能能

✤ DIS（數位防手震功能）功能僅可在 <Camera> 模式下操作0 ➥第 19 頁 ✤ DIS（數位防手震功能）是補償手握攝錄放影機時所産生的任何震動或手

部動作的功能（在合理範圍內）0

√Auto √Auto √Off √Off √Off √Off

MENUOKZOOM

Off On

MENUOKZOOM

0:00:10

60min

(DIS)

✤ 央在以下情況可提供更穩定的怜面：

- 使用縮放進行錄製（DIS 不可在數位縮放模式中

使用）0

- 錄製小型物體特寫

- 一邊走動一邊進行錄製

- 透過車鎖進行錄製

1. 將 [Power]

2. 將 [Mode]

3. 按下 [MENU] 按瞿0

4. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

5. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

6. 若要啓動 DIS 功能，請向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

7. 按 [MENU]

附附註註

[

■

（（電電源源））

開關設定爲 [CAMERA]0

（（模模式式））

（僅限 SC-D363/D364/ D365/D366）

■

選單淸單將會顯示0

<Camera>，然後按下 [OK]

後按下 [OK]

（（縮縮放放））

■

若舅不希望使用 DIS 功能，請將 <DIS> 選單設定爲 <Off>0

■

DIS ( ) 圖示將會顯示0

]

舅可以使用 [QUICK MENU] 取 DIS 功能0 ➥第 20 頁數位縮放/色彩夜拍/浮雕2/蠟筆2/鏡像或馬賽克不可在 DIS 模式中使用0 16:9 寬螢幕不可在 DIS 模式中使用0

（僅限 SC-D263/D362/D363/D364）

當舅在啓用 DIS 功能的情況下按 [PHOTO] 按瞿時，DIS 將被短暫解除，橙在靜止影像錄製完成後自動恢復0 建議舅在使用三苛架時關閉 DIS 功能0 若舅使用 DIS 功能/怜面品質可能下降0 簡易拍攝模式會自動把 <DIS> 設定爲 <On>0

開關設定爲 [TAPE]

按瞿0

（（縮縮放放））

（（確確定定））

桿以選擇 <On>，然後按下 [OK]

（（選選單單））

按瞿以結束0

（（錄錄影影帶帶））

（（縮縮放放））

（（確確定定））

桿以選擇

按瞿0

桿以選擇 <DIS>，然

（（確確定定））

（（快快速速選選單單））

按瞿直接存

按瞿0

5555

ENGLISH

Advanced Recording

Zooming In and Out with Digital Zoom (Digital Zoom)

✤ Maximum Digital Zoom works only in <Camera> mode. ➥page 19 ✤ Zooming more than 33x (30x ; SC-D263/D363) is achieved digitally,

up to 1200x when combined with optical zoom.

✤ The picture quality may deteriorate depending on how much you

digitally zoom in on the subject.

Selecting the Digital Zoom

1. Set the [Power] switch to [CAMERA].

2. Set the [Mode] switch to [TAPE]. (SC-D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

3. Press the [MENU] button.

■

The menu list will appear.

4. Move the [Zoom] lever to the up or down to select <Camera>, then press the [OK] button.

5. Move the [Zoom] lever to the up or down to select <Digital Zoom>, then press the [OK] button.

6. Move the [Zoom] lever to the up or down to select desired zoom value (Off, 100x, 200x, 400x or 1200x), then press the [OK] button.

7. To exit, press the [MENU] button.

■

Move the [Zoom] lever to the up or down to use the Digital Zoom.

■

The Digital Zoom indicator appears.

[ Notes ]

■

Maximum Digital zooming may result in lower picture quality.

■

Digital Zoom is not available while DIS, EASY.Q, still image recording, COLOR NITE, 16:9 Wide, Emboss2, Pastel2, Mirror or Mosaic is in use.

■

Once still image recording, COLOR NITE, 16:9 Wide, Emboss2, Pastel2, Mirror or Mosaic is set, Digital Zoom mode will be released. (The Digital Zoom mode will be backed up.)

■

Once DIS or EASY.Q is set, Digital Zoom mode will be released.

5656

Camera Mode

√Camera

Program AE White Balance Visual Effect 16:9 Wide DIS Digital Zoom

Move Select Exit

Camera Mode

Back

Program AE White Balance Visual Effect 16:9 Wide DIS

Digital Zoom

Move Select Exit

STBY

W T

進進階階錄錄製製

使使用用數數位位縮縮放放來來放放大大及及縮縮小小（（數數位位縮縮放放））

✤ 最大程度的數位縮放功能僅可在 <Camera> 模式下操作0 ➥第 19 頁 ✤ 33 倍（30 倍；SC-D263/D363）以上的縮放是以數位形式來完成，在結

合光學縮放時可進行高達 1200 倍的縮放0

✤ 怜面品質可能因爲舅對主體的數位放大程度而降低0

選選擇擇數數位位縮縮放放

（（電電源源））

開關設定爲 [CAMERA]0

（（模模式式））

開關設定爲 [TAPE]

（（錄錄影影帶帶））

（僅限 SC-D363/D364/ D365/D366）

■

選單淸單將會顯示0

（（縮縮放放））

桿以選擇

<Camera>，然後按下 [OK]

<Digital Zoom>，然後按下 [OK]

放値（（Off 下 [OK]

■

100x

（（確確定定））

按瞿0

（（選選單單））

向上或向下移動 [Zoom] 放0 將出現數位縮放指示器0

（（確確定定））

（（縮縮放放））

200x

400x或或1200x）），然後按

按瞿以結束0

（（縮縮放放））

按瞿0

桿以選擇

（（確確定定））

按瞿0

桿以選擇所要的縮

桿以使用數位縮

]

最大程度的數位縮放可能導致較低的怜面品質0 數位縮放不可在 DIS/ 簡易拍攝/ 靜止影像錄製/ 色彩夜拍/ 16：9 寬螢幕/ 浮雕2/ 蠟筆2/ 鏡像或馬賽克模式中使用0 一旦設定了靜止影像錄製/ 色彩夜拍/ 16：9 寬螢幕/ 浮雕2/ 蠟筆2/ 鏡像或馬賽克模式，數位縮放模式將被解除0（數位縮放模式將被備略0）一旦設定了 DIS 或簡易拍攝，數位縮放模式將被解除0

√Auto √Auto √Off √Off √Off √Off

Off 100x 200x 400x 1200x

MENUOKZOOM

1. 將 [Power]

2. 將 [Mode]

3. 按下 [MENU] 按瞿0

4. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

5. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

6. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

7. 按 [MENU]

0:00:10

60min

[

■

附附註註

ENGLISH

QUICK MENU

Advanced Recording

Still Image Recording

✤ Still image recording works only in <Camera> mode.

➥page 19

✤ A tape must be inserted as Still Images are recorded on a

tape.

1. Set the [Power] switch to [CAMERA].

2. Set the [Mode] switch to [TAPE]. (SC-D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

3. Press the [PHOTO] button.

■

The still image is recorded for about 6~7 seconds.

4. After the still image has been recorded, the Camcorder returns to its previous mode.

Searching for a still image

✤ The Photo Search works only in <Player> mode. ➥page 19

1. Set the [Power] switch to [PLAYER].

2. Set the [Mode] switch to [TAPE]. (SC-D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

3. Press the [MENU] button.

■

The menu list will appear.

4. Move the [Zoom] lever to the up or down to select <Tape>, then press the [OK] button.

5. Move the [Zoom] lever to the up or down to select <Photo Search>, then press the [OK] button.

■

œœ /√√ will flash on the LCD.

6. Press the [

7. To exit, press the [■ (STOP)] or [MENU] button.

[ Notes ]

■

œœœœ/√√√√

■

The photo search process appears while you are searching.

■

After completing the search, the Camcorder displays the still image. When there are no still images recorded on the tape, it will be fully rewound or forwarded.

Still image recording is not available while recording. You can use still image recording by using the [PHOTO] button on the remote control. Pressing the [PHOTO] button on the remote control records the still image at with automatic focusing. (SC-D364/D366 only) Still image recording is not available while COLOR NITE or 16:9 Wide is in use. DIS, Digital Zoom, COLOR NITE, Visual Effect are not available, when still image recording. Still image recording while EASY.Q, DIS or Digital Zoom mode is in use will release the current mode. (After a still image is taken, the mode will return automatically.)

(REW/FF)] buttons to search the still image.

Player Mode

√Tape

Photo Search Photo Copy Audio Select Audio Effect

Move Select Exit

Photo Search

œœœœ /√√√√

Photo Search

œœœœ /√√√√

Search Exit

Photo searching...

Search Exit

進進階階錄錄製製

錄錄製製靜靜止止影影像像

√Sound[1] √Off

MENUOKZOOM

0:41:56:10

25min

0:44:38:03

25min

✤ 靜止影像錄製功能僅可在 <Camera> 模式下操作0

➥第 19 頁

✤ 必須揷入錄影帶，因爲靜止影像已錄製在錄影帶上0

1. 將 [Power]

2. 將 [Mode]

3. 按 [PHOTO] 按瞿0

4. 在靜止影像被錄製後，攝錄放影機將返回之前模式0

（（電電源源））

開關設定爲 [CAMERA]0

（（模模式式））

（僅限 SC-D363/D364/ D365/D366）

■

將錄製靜止影像 6~7 秒0

開關設定爲 [TAPE]

（（錄錄影影帶帶））

搜搜尋尋靜靜止止影影像像

✤ Photo Search

作0 ➥第 19 頁

1. 將 [Power]

2. 將 [Mode] （僅限 SC-D363/D364/ D365/D366）

3. 按下 [MENU] 按瞿0

■

4. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

下 [OK]

5. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

<Photo Search>，然後按下 [OK]

■

6. 按 [

■

7. 按 [■ (STOP)]

附附註註

[

■

靜止影像錄製不可在錄製時使用0

■

舅可以使用遙控器上的 [PHOTO]按瞿來進行靜止影像錄製0 按遙控器上的 [PHOTO]按瞿將可錄製自動對焦的靜止影像0

（僅限 SC-D364/D366）

■

靜止影像錄製不可在色彩夜拍或 16:9 寬螢幕模式中使用0

■

DIS/ 數位縮放/ 色彩夜拍/ 視訊效果不可在靜止影像錄製時使用0

■

在使用簡易拍攝/ DIS 或數位縮放模式時進行靜止影像錄製將會解除目前模式0（在拍攝靜止影像後，模式將自動返回0）

（（相相片片搜搜尋尋））

功能僅可在 <Player> 模式下操

（（電電源源））

開關設定爲 [PLAYER]

（（模模式式））

開關設定爲 [TAPE]

選單淸單將會顯示0

（（確確定定））

œœ /√√ 將會在 LCD 上閃鹵0

œœœœ/√√√√

當舅在進行搜尋時，相片搜尋過程會顯示0 當完成搜尋後，攝錄放影機會顯示靜止影像0

按瞿0

(REW/FF)]

（（停停止止））或或

（（縮縮放放））

（（回回轉轉/快快進進））

[MENU]

（（播播放放機機））

（（錄錄影影帶帶））

桿以選擇 <Tape>，然後按

桿以選擇

（（確確定定））

按瞿0

按瞿以搜尋靜止影像0

（（選選單單））

按瞿以結束0

]

5757

ENGLISH

COLOR NITE

LIGHT

STOP

QUICK MENU

Playback

Playing Back a Tape You have recorded on the LCD Screen

✤ The Playback function and speaker works only in <Player> mode. ➥page 19 ✤ You can monitor the playback picture on the LCD Screen.

1. Set the [Power] switch to [PLAYER].

2. Set the [Mode] switch to [TAPE]. (SC-D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

3. Insert the tape you wish to view. ➥page 32

4. Open the LCD Screen.

■

Adjust the angle of the LCD Screen and set the brightness or color if necessary.

5. Press the [

6. Press the [√√/

Adjusting the LCD Bright/LCD Color during Playback

✤ You can adjust the LCD Bright/LCD Color during playback. ✤ The adjustment method is the same procedure as used

Adjusting the Volume

✤ When you use the LCD Screen for playback, you can

✤ When you hear sounds once the tape is in play, use the

✤ When the AV cable is connected to the Camcorder, you cannot hear sound

✤ Volume control is disabled while PB Zoom is in use.

5858

œœœœ

starting point.

■

(REW)] button to rewind the tape to the

To stop rewinding, press the [■ (STOP)] button. The Camcorder stops automatically after rewinding is complete.

❙❙ (PLAY/STILL)] button to start playback.

You can view the picture you recorded on the LCD Screen. To stop the play operation, press the [■ (STOP)] button.

in <Camera> mode. ➥page 29

hear recorded sound from the built-in Speaker.

- Take the following steps to lower the volume or mute

the sound while playing a tape on the Camcorder.

[Zoom] lever to adjust the volume.

■

A volume level display will appear on the LCD Screen.

■

Levels may be adjusted from anywhere between <00> to <19>.

■

If you close the LCD Screen while playing, you will not hear sound from the speaker.

from the Built-In Speaker and cannot adjust the volume.

5 6

[05]

播播放放

在在

✤ 播放功能和喇叭僅可在 <Player> 模式下操作0 ➥第 19 頁 ✤ 舅可以在 LCD 螢幕上監視播放怜面0

√

…

†

螢螢幕幕上上播播放放舅舅所所錄錄製製的的錄錄影影帶帶

LCD

1. 將 [Power]

2. 將 [Mode]

3. 放入舅要檢視的錄影帶0 ➥第 32 頁

4. 打開 LCD 螢幕0

5. 按 [

6. 按 [√√/❙❙(PLAY/STILL)]

（（模模式式））

（僅限 SC-D363/D364/ D365/D366）

■

調整 LCD 螢幕的角度，如有必要，設定亮度或色彩

œœœœ

(REW)]

■

若要停止回轉，請按 [■ (STOP)]

■

攝錄放影機將在全部回轉後自動停止0

■

舅可以在 LCD 螢幕上檢視舅所錄製的怜面0

■

若要停止播放操作，請按 [■(STOP)]

在在播播放放期期間間調調整整

✤ 舅可以在播放期間調整 LCD 亮度/LCD 色彩0 ✤ 調整方法和在 <Camera> 模式中使用的程序相同0

➥第 29 頁

調調整整音音量量

0:46:00:11

✤ 當舅使用 LCD 螢幕來播放時，舅可以從內建喇叭聽到

60min

所錄製的音效0

- 在攝錄放影機上播放錄影帶時採取以下步驟來調

低音量或設定靜音0

✤ 當舅聽到錄影帶播放的音效時，使用 [Zoom]

來調整音量0

■

LCD 螢幕上會出現音量顯示0

■

音量可在 <00> 到 <19> 之間進行調整0

■

若舅在進行播放時關閉 LCD 螢幕，舅將不會從喇叭聽到音效0

✤ 當AV 纜線連接到攝錄放影機時，舅將無法從內建喇叭

聽到音效，同時也不能調整音量0

✤ 音量控制不可在播放縮放模式中使用0

（（電電源源））

（（回回轉轉））

開關設定爲 [PLAYER]

開關設定爲 [TAPE]

按瞿以將錄影帶回轉到起點0

（（播播放放/靜靜止止））

亮亮度度

LCD

（（錄錄影影帶帶））

（（停停止止））

按瞿以開始播放0

/LCD

（（播播放放機機））

（（停停止止））

色色彩彩

按瞿0

（（縮縮放放））

桿

ENGLISH

MF/AF

Playback

Various Functions while in Player Mode

✤ This function works only in <Player> mode. ➥page 19 ✤ The [PLAY], [STILL], [STOP], [FF], and [REW] buttons are located

on the Camcorder and the remote control. (SC-D364/D366 only)

✤ The [F.ADV] (Frame advance), [X2], and [SLOW] buttons are

located on the remote control only. (SC-D364/D366 only)

✤ To prevent tape and head-drum wear, your Camcorder will

automatically stop if it is left in still or slow modes for more than 3 minutes.

Playback Pause

■

Press the [√√/❙❙ (PLAY/STILL)] button during playback.

■

To resume playback, press the [√√/❙❙ (PLAY/STILL)] button.

Picture Search (Forward/Reverse)

■

Press the [ playback or still mode. To resume normal playback, press the [√√/❙❙ (PLAY/STILL)] button.

■

Keep pressing [ during playback or still mode. To resume normal playback, release the button.

Slow Playback (Forward/Reverse) (SC-D364/D366 only)

■

Forward Slow Playback

- Press the [SLOW] button on the remote control

- To resume normal playback, press the [√√/❙❙

■

Reverse Slow Playback

- Press the [œœ❙❙ (-)] button during forward slow play back.

- To resume forward slow playback, press the [❙❙√√(+)] button.

- To resume normal playback, press the [√√/❙❙ (PLAY/STILL)]

œœœœ

(REW)] /[

œœœœ

(REW)] / [

during playback.

(PLAY/STILL)] button.

button.

√√√√

(FF)] buttons during

√√√√

(FF)] buttons

<SC-D364/D366 only>

播播放放

播播放放機機模模式式中中的的各各項項功功能能

✤ 此功能僅可在 <Player> 模式下操作0 ➥第 19 頁

（（播播放放））//

✤ [PLAY]

（（回回轉轉））

[REW]

（僅限 SC-D364/D366）

（（逐逐幀幀播播放放））//

✤ [F.ADV]

胥到0（僅限 SC-D364/D366）

✤ 爲避免錄影帶和磁鼓耗損，舅的攝錄放影機會在靜止或慢動作模式中

停留超過 3 分鐘後自動停止

（（靜靜止止））//

[STILL]

按瞿可在攝錄放影機和遙控器上胥到0

[X2] 和和[SLOW]

播播放放暫暫停停

■

在播放期間按 [√√/❙❙ (PLAY/STILL)] 瞿0

■

若要恢復播放，請按 [√√/❙❙ (PLAY/STILL)]

靜靜止止））

按瞿0

怜怜面面搜搜尋尋（（前前進進/倒倒退退））

■

在播放或靜止模式中按 [

√√√√

（（快快進進））

[

(FF)]

若要恢復正常播放，請按 [√√/❙❙(PLAY/STILL)]

（（播播放放/靜靜止止））

■

在播放或靜止模式中按住 [

√√√√

（（快快進進））

[

(FF)]

若要恢復正常播放，請放開該按瞿0

慢慢動動作作播播放放（（前前進進/倒倒退退））（（僅僅限限

））

D366

■

慢動作前進播放

- 播放時按遙控器上的 [SLOW]

- 若要恢復正常播放，請按 [√√/❙❙ (PLAY/STILL)]

（（播播放放/靜靜止止））

■

慢動作倒退播放

- 在慢動作前進播放期間按 [œœ❙❙ (-)] 按瞿0

■

若要恢復慢動作前進播放，請按 [❙❙√√(+)] 按瞿0

- 若要恢復正常播放，請按 [√√/❙❙ (PLAY/STILL)] （（播播放放/靜靜止止））

[STOP]

按瞿0

（（慢慢動動作作））

按瞿0

（（停停止止））//

[FF]

按瞿僅可在遙控器上

œœœœ

(REW)]

œœœœ

(REW)]

SC-D364/

（（慢慢動動作作））

（（快快進進））和和

（（播播放放/靜靜止止））

（（回回轉轉））

（（播播放放

按瞿0

按

5959

ENGLISH

Playback

Frame Advance (To play back frame by frame) (SC-D364/D366 only)

■

Press the [F.ADV] button on the remote control while in still mode.

- Video sequence advances frame by frame each time you press the [F.ADV] button.

- The F.ADV function works in still mode only.

■

To resume normal playback, press the [√√/❙❙ (PLAY/STILL)] button.

- Forward frame advance.

Press the [F.ADV] button on the remote control in still mode.

- Reverse frame advance

Press the [œœ❙❙ (-)] button on the remote control to change the direction in F.ADV mode. Press the [F.ADV] button on the remote control.

X2 Playback (Forward/Reverse) (SC-D364/D366 only)

■

Forward X2 Playback

- Press the [X2] button on the remote control during playback.

- To resume normal playback, press the [√√/❙❙ (PLAY/STILL)] button.

■

Reverse X2 Playback

- Press the [œœ❙❙ (-)] button during forward X2 playback.

- To resume normal playback, press the [√√/❙❙ (PLAY/STILL)] button.

Reverse Playback (SC-D364/D366 only)

■

To playback in reverse at normal speed, press the [œœ❙❙ (-)] button during normal forward playback.

■

Press the [√√/■■(PLAY/STILL)] or [❙❙√√(+)] button to return to normal forward playback.

[ Notes ]

■

Mosaic shaped distortion may appear on the screen while in some of the various playback modes. Mosaic shaped distortion or noise may be experienced when you play back tapes recorded in LP which contain various playback functions.

■

Sound will only be heard during normal SP or LP playback.

6060

<SC-D364/D366 only>

播播放放

逐逐幀幀播播放放（（按按逐逐幀幀進進行行播播放放

（（僅僅限限

SC-D364/D366

■

在靜止模式中，按遙控器上的 [F.ADV] 按瞿0

- 視訊順序會在舅每次按 [F.ADV]

時按逐幀播放0

- F.ADV（逐幀播放）功能僅可在靜止模式下操作0

■

若要恢復正常播放，請按 [√√/❙❙ (PLAY/STILL)]

（（播播放放/靜靜止止））

按瞿0

逐逐幀幀前前進進播播放放在靜止模式中，按遙控器上的 [F.ADV]

（（逐逐幀幀播播放放））

逐逐幀幀倒倒退退播播放放

按瞿0

按遙控器上的 [œœ❙❙ (-)] 按瞿以變更逐幀播放模式的方向0 按遙控器上的 [F.ADV]

播播放放（（前前進進/倒倒退退））（（

■

X2 前進播放

- 播放時按遙控器上的 [X2] 按瞿0

- 若要恢復正常播放，請按 [√√/❙❙ (PLAY/STILL)]

■

X2 倒退播放

- 在 X2 前進播放期間按 [œœ❙❙ (-)] 按瞿0

僅僅限限

SC-D364/D366

- 若要恢復正常播放，請按 [√√/❙❙ (PLAY/STILL)]

倒倒退退播播放放（（僅僅限限

■

要以正常速度倒退播放，請在正常前進播放時按 [œœ❙❙ (-)] 按瞿0

■

按 [√√/■■(PLAY/STILL)] 播放0

附附註註

[

]

■

一些播放模式中可能會在螢幕上出現馬賽克狀失眞0 當舅播放以 LP 錄製，具有多項播放功能的錄影帶時，可能會經歷馬賽

克狀失眞或筮波0

■

只有在正常 SP 或 LP 播放時可聽到音效0

SC-D364/D366

（（播播放放/靜靜止止））

））

或 [❙❙√√(+)] 按瞿以返回正常前進

））

（（逐逐幀幀播播放放））

））

（（播播放放/靜靜止止））

（（逐逐幀幀播播放放））

按瞿0

按瞿

ENGLISH

COLOR NITE

LIG

MACRO

PB ZOOM

QUICK MENU

Playback

Zooming during Playback (PB ZOOM)

✤ The PB Zoom function works in <Player> mode. ➥page 19 ✤ The PB Zoom function enables you to magnify the playback or still

image.

1. Set the [Power] switch to [PLAYER].

2. Set the [Mode] switch to [TAPE]. (SC-D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

3. Press the [PB ZOOM] button in playback or still mode.

4. The image is magnified starting from the center of the image.

5. You can zoom in from 1.2x to 8.0x by moving the [Zoom] lever.

■

Zoom ratio is not displayed.

6. To cancel the PB Zoom function, press the [PB

ZOOM] or [■ (STOP)] button.

[ Notes ]

■

The PB Zoom function enlarges the center of the screen only.

■

You cannot apply the PB Zoom function to pictures which are being input from an external video source.

■

The PB Zoom image cannot be imported to your PC from the Camcorder’s DV jack.

■

The PB Zoom images cannot be exported to a PC.

■

Volume control is disabled while PB Zoom is in use.

PB ZOOM

1.2X

播播放放

在在播播放放時時縮縮放放（（播播放放縮縮放放））

✤ 播放縮放功能可在 <Player> 模式下操作0 ➥第 19 頁 ✤ 播放縮放功能可讓舅放大播放或靜止影像0

1. 將 [Power]

2. 將 [Mode] （僅限 SC-D363/D364/ D365/D366）

3. 在播放模式或靜止模式中按下 [PB ZOOM]

4. 該影像會從影像的中央開始放大0

5. 舅可以透過移動 [Zoom]

6. 若要取消播放縮放功能，請按 [PB ZOOM]

0:46:00:11

√

60min

[

■

附附註註

（（電電源源））

開關設定爲 [PLAYER]

（（模模式式））

開關設定爲 [TAPE]

放放））

按瞿0

（（縮縮放放））

至 8.0 倍0

■

縮放率將不顯示0

放放））

或 [■ (STOP)]

（（停停止止））

]

播放縮放功能僅可放大螢幕的中央0 若舅不可以將播放縮放功能套用到從外部視訊來源輸入的相片0 播放縮放影像不可從攝錄放影機的 DV 揷孔導入到電腦0 播放縮放影像不可導出到電腦0 音量控制不可在播放縮放模式中使用0

（（錄錄影影帶帶））

桿將影像放大 1.2 倍

按瞿0

（（播播放放機機））

（（播播放放縮縮

6161

ENGLISH

USB

/ S

Playback

Audio Dubbing (SC-D364/D366 only)

✤ The Audio Dubbing function works only in <Player> mode. ➥page 19 ✤ You can not dub sound on a pre-recorded tape in LP or 16 bit mode. ✤ You can add sound to the original sound on a pre-recorded tape

recorded in SP mode with 12bit sound.

✤ Use the internal or an external microphone(not supplied) or other

audio equipment.

✤ The original sound will not be erased.

1. Set the [Power] switch to [PLAYER].

■

If you want to use an external microphone, connect the microphone to the external MIC input jack on the Camcorder.

2. Set the [Mode] switch to [TAPE].

3. Press the [√√/❙❙ (PLAY/STILL)] button and find the time frame of the scene to be dubbed.

4. Press the [√√/❙❙ (PLAY/STILL)] button to pause the scene.

5. Press the [A.DUB] button on the remote control.

■

Audio Dubbing icon ( ) is displayed.

■

The Camcorder is ready for dubbing.

6. Press the [√√/❙❙ (PLAY/STILL)] button to start dubbing.

■

Press the [■ (STOP)] button to stop the dubbing.

[ Notes ]

■

You can not use the Audio Dubbing function while playing a write protected video tape.

■

To utilize an external MIC or sound source, connect a microphone to the MIC jack or use the Multi-AV Cable (or AV JACK; SC-D263/D363 only) to connect external sound source input.

■

To dub an external sound source, set the <AV In/Out> function to <AV In> (SC-D365/D366 only). ➥page 67

6262

3 4 5

播播放放

配配音音（（僅僅限限

SC-D364/D366

✤ 配音功能僅可在 <Player> 模式下操作0 ➥第 19 頁 ✤ 舅不能爲以 LP 或 16 位元模式預先錄製的錄影帶進行配音0 ✤ 舅可以爲預先錄製的錄影帶上以 SP 模式錄製的 12 位元原始音效新增

音效0

✤ 使用內建或外接式麥克風（未提供）或其他聲訊設備0 ✤ 原始音效將不會被刪除0

√

附附註註

[

]

■

舅不能在播放具有寫入保護的錄影帶時使用配音功能0

■

要使用外接式麥克風或音源，請將麥克風連接到 MIC 揷孔或使用 Multi-AV 纜線（或 AV揷孔；僅限 SC-D263/D363）來連接外部音源輸

入0

■

要配入外部音源，請將 <AV In/Out> 功能設定爲 <AV In>（僅限 SC- D364/D365/D366）0 ➥第 67 頁

））

1. 將 [Power] （（播播放放機機））

2. 將 [Mode] （（錄錄影影帶帶））

3. 按 [√√/❙❙ (PLAY/STILL)]

4. 按 [√√/❙❙ (PLAY/STILL)]

5. 按遙控器上的 [A.DUB]

6. 按 [√√/❙❙ (PLAY/STILL)]

（（電電源源））

開關設定爲 [PLAYER]

■

若舅要使用外接式麥克風，請將麥克風連接到攝錄放影機上的外接式 MIC 輸入揷孔0

（（模模式式））

開關設定爲 [TAPE]

（（播播放放/靜靜止止））

瞿，然後尋胥要配音的場景時間幀0

（（播播放放/靜靜止止））

以暫停場景0

■

配音 ( ) 圖示將會顯示0

■

攝錄放影機就緖進行配音0

（（配配音音））

（（播播放放/靜靜止止））

瞿以開始配音0

■

按 [■ (STOP)]

（（停停止止））

按瞿以停止配

音0

按

按瞿

按瞿0

按

ENGLISH

Playback

Dubbed Audio Playback

✤ The dubbed Audio Playback function works only in <Player> mode.

➥page 19

1. Set the [Power] switch to [PLAYER].

2. Set the [Mode] switch to [TAPE]. (SC-D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

3. Insert the dubbed tape and press the [MENU] button.

4. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select <Tape>, then press the [OK] button.

5. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select <Audio Select>, then press the [OK] button.

6. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select the audio playback channel, then press the [OK] button.

■

<Sound[1]>: play the original sound.

■

<Sound[2]>: play the dubbed sound.

■

<MIX[1+2]>: play back Sound1 and 2 equally mixed.

7. To exit, press the [MENU] button.

8. Press the [√√/❙❙ (PLAY/STILL)] button to playback the dubbed tape.

[ Note ] When you play back added sound (Sound [2] or MIX[1+2]), you may experience a loss of sound quality.

Player Mode

√Tape

Photo Search Photo Copy Audio Select Audio Effect

Move Select Exit

Player Mode

Back

Photo Search Photo Copy

Audio Select

Audio Effect

Move Select Exit

Sound[2]

播播放放

配配音音後後的的聲聲訊訊播播放放

✤ 配音後的聲訊播放功能僅可在 <Player> 模式下操作0 ➥第 19 頁

1. 將 [Power]

2. 將 [Mode]

√Sound[1] √Off

（僅限 SC-D363/D364/ D365/D366）

3. 放入配音後的錄影帶，橙按 [MENU]

MENUOKZOOM

4. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

5. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

Sound[1] Sound[2] MIX[1+2]

MENUOKZOOM

0:01:53:10

√

6. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

7. 按 [MENU]

20min

8. 按 [√√/❙❙(PLAY/STILL)]

附附註註

[

當舅在播放新增的音效時（Sound [2]）或 MIX[1+2]），音效品質可能會有遺失0

（（電電源源））

開關設定爲 [PLAYER]

（（模模式式））

開關設定爲 [TAPE]

（（縮縮放放））

按瞿0

（（縮縮放放））

（（確確定定））

（（縮縮放放））

（（確確定定））

桿以選擇 <Tape>，

桿以選擇 <Audio

按瞿0

桿以選擇聲訊播放

按瞿0

然後按下 [OK]

（（確確定定））

Select>，然後按下 [OK]

頻道，然後按下 [OK]

■

<Sound[1]>：播放原始音效0

■

<Sound[2]>：播放配音0

■

<MIX[1+2]>：播放混合的音效 1 及 20

（（選選單單））

按瞿以結束0

（（播播放放/靜靜止止））

後的錄影帶0

]

（（播播放放機機））

（（錄錄影影帶帶））

（（選選單單））

按瞿0

按瞿以播放配音

6363

ENGLISH

U I C

E N U

AV/ S

Q U

I C

K M E

Playback

Tape Playback

✤ The Playback function works only in <Player> mode. ➥page 19 Playing back on a TV Monitor

✤ To play back a tape, the television must be

NTSC compatible. ➥page 97

✤ We recommend that you use the AC

Power adapter as the power source for the Camcorder.

Connecting to a TV which has Audio/Video Input Jacks

1. Connect the Camcorder to your TV with Audio/Video Cable or Multi Cable.

■

The yellow jack: Video

■

The white jack: Audio(L)-mono, The red jack: Audio(R)

■

If you connect to a monaural TV, connect the yellow jack (Video) to the video input of the TV and the white jack (Audio L) to the audio input of the TV.

2. Set the [Power] switch to [PLAYER].

3. Set the [Mode] switch to [TAPE]. (SC-D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

4. Turn on the TV and set the TV/VIDEO selector on the TV to Video.

■

Refer to the TV user’s manual.

5. Play the tape. ➥page 63

[ Notes ]

■

You may use an S-Video connector on the cable to obtain better quality pictures if you have a S-Video connector on your TV. (SC-D362/D364/D365/D366 only)

■

Even if you use an S-Video connector, you need to connect an audio cable. (SC-D362/D364/D365/D366 only)

■

If you connect the cable to the Audio/Video jack or AV/S jack, you will not hear sound from the Camcorder's speaker.

■

If only a mono audio input is available on the TV set, use the audio cable with the white jack (Audio L).

6464

✤

Connect the Multi AV/S jack with the triangle mark facing down. (SC-D362/D364/D365/D366 only)

播播放放

錄錄影影帶帶播播放放

✤ 播放功能僅可在 <Player> 模式下操作0 ➥第 19 頁

Multi Cable (SC-D362/

Signal flow

Multi Cable

Signal flow

AV Cable

D364/D365/D366)

AV Cable

(SC-D263/D363)

■

Camcorder

若舅將纜線連接到聲訊/視訊揷孔或 AV/S 揷孔，舅將不會聽到攝錄放影機的喇叭所發出的音效0 若電視機上只有一個單聲道聲訊輸入可以使用，請將聲訊纜線用於白色揷孔（Audio L（聲訊左））0

在在電電視視機機顯顯示示器器上上播播放放

✤ 要播放錄影帶，該電視機必須爲 NTSC 相容

型0

➥第 97 頁

✤ 我們建議舅使用交流電源適配器作爲攝錄放

影機的電源0

連連接接到到具具有有聲聲訊訊/視視訊訊輸輸入入揷揷孔孔的的電電視視機機

1. 使用聲訊/視訊纜線或 Multi 纜線將攝錄放影

機連接到電視機0

■

黃色揷孔：視訊

■

白色揷孔： Audio(L)（聲訊（左））- 單聲道，紅色揷孔：Audio(R)（聲訊（右））

■

若舅連接了單聲道電視機，請將黃色揷孔

（視訊）連接到電視機的視訊輸入橙將白色

揷孔（聲訊左）連接到電視機的聲訊輸入0

2. 將 [Power]

3. 將 [Mode]

4. 打開電視機，然後將電視機上的 TV/VIDEO

5. 播放錄影帶0

附附註註

[

■

（（電電源源））

（（播播放放機機））

帶帶））

0（僅限 SC-D363/D364/ D365/D366）

（電視機/視訊）選擇器設定爲 Video（視訊）0

■

請參閱電視機的使用者手冊0

]

若舅的電視機上有 S-Video 連接器，舅可以使用纜線上的 S-Video 連接器以取得品質更佳的怜面0

（僅限 SC-D362/D364/ D365/D366）

卽使舅使用 S-Video 連接器，舅仍然需要連接聲訊纜線0

（僅限 SC-D362/D364/ D365/D366）

開關設定爲 [PLAYER]

（（模模式式））

開關設定爲 [TAPE]

➥第 63 頁

（（錄錄影影

ENGLISH

U I C

E N

AV/ S

Q U I

K M E N

Playback

Connecting to a TV which has no Audio/Video Input Jacks

✤ You can connect your Camcorder to a TV through a VCR.

1. Connect the Camcorder to your VCR with Audio/Video Cable or Multi Cable.

■

The yellow jack: Video

■

The white jack: Audio(L) - Mono

■

The red jack: Audio(R)

2. Connect a TV to the VCR.

3. Set the [Power] switch to [PLAYER].

4. Set the [Mode] switch to [TAPE]. (SC-D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

5. Turn on both the TV and VCR.

■

Set the input selector on the VCR to Line.

■

Select the channel reserved for your VCR on the TV set.

6. Play the tape.

Playback

1. Connect a power source and set the [Power] switch to [PLAYER].

2. Set the [Mode] switch to [TAPE]. (SC-D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

3. Insert the tape you wish to play back.

4. Using the [ find the first position you wish to play back.

5. Press the [√√/❙❙ (PLAY/STILL)] button.

■

[ Notes ]

■

The playback mode (SP/LP) is selected automatically.

■

If the VCR has an S-Video input terminal, you may use the S-Video connector for better quality. (SC-D362/D364/D365/D366 only)

■

The S-Video connector transmits video only. Connect audio cables for sound.

■

If only a mono audio input is available on the TV set, use the audio cable with the white jack (Audio L).

œœœœ

The images you recorded will appear on the TV after a few seconds. If a tape reaches its end while being played back, the tape will rewind automatically.

(REW)] /[

√√√√

(FF)] buttons,

VCR

Antenna

VCR

Antenna

播播放放

連連接接到到不不具具有有聲聲訊訊/視視訊訊輸輸入入揷揷孔孔的的電電視視機機

✤ 舅可以透過 VCR 將舅的攝錄放影機連接到電視機0

1. 使用聲訊/視訊纜線或 Multi 纜線將攝錄放影

機連接到 VCR0

■

2. 將電視機連接到 VCR0

3. 將 [Power]

（（播播放放機機））

4. 將 [Mode] （（錄錄影影帶帶））（僅限 SC-D363/D364/D365/D366）

5. 打開電視機和 VCR0

■

6. 播放錄影帶0

播播放放

1. 連接電源，橙將 [Power]

[PLAYER]

2. 將 [Mode]（模式）開關設定爲 [TAPE]（錄影

帶）0（僅限 SC-D363/D364/D365/D366）

3. 放入舅要播放的錄影帶0

舅所錄製的影像會在數秒後出現在電視機上0 若錄影帶在播放時播到帶子結束，錄影帶將自動回轉0

]

Signal flow

Multi Cable

Signal flow

AV Cable

Multi Cable

(SC-D362/D364/

D365/D366)

AV Cable

(SC-D263/D363)

Camcorder

4. 使用 [œœ(REW)]

播放的首個位置0

5. 按[√√/❙❙ (PLAY/STILL)]

■

附附註註

[

■

將會自動選擇播放模式 (SP/LP)0

■

若 VCR 具有 S-Video 輸入端，舅可以使用 S-Video 連接器以取得更佳品質0（僅限 SC-D362/D364/ D365/ D366）

■

S-Video 連接器僅傳遞視訊0 連接聲訊纜線以獲取音效0

■

若電視機上只有一個單聲道聲訊輸入可以使用，請將聲訊纜線用於白色揷孔（Audio L（聲訊左））0

黃色揷孔：視訊白色揷孔： Audio(L)（聲訊（左））- 單聲道紅色揷孔： Audio(R)（聲訊（右））

（（電電源源））

開關設定爲 [PLAYER]

（（模模式式））

開關設定爲 [TAPE]

將 VCR 上的輸入選擇器設定爲 Line（線路）0 在電視機上選擇爲舅的 VCR 保留的頻道0

（（電電源源））

（（播播放放機機））

（（回回轉轉））/[√√√√

（（播播放放/靜靜止止））

(FF)]

（（快快進進））

開關設定爲

按瞿，尋胥舅要

按瞿0

6565

ENGLISH

Playback

播播放放

Audio Effect

✤ Audio Effect function works only in <Player> mode. ➥page 19 ✤ Audio Effect provides various playback effects to audio signals stored

on a tape.

1. Set the [Power] switch to [PLAYER].

2. Set the [Mode] switch to [TAPE]. (SC-D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

3. Insert the dubbed tape and press the [MENU] button.

4. Move the [Zoom] lever to the up or down to select <Tape>, then press the [OK] button.

5. Move the [Zoom] lever to the up or down to select <Audio Effect>, then press the [OK] button.

6. Move the [Zoom] lever to the up or down to select the audio effect channel, then press the [OK] button.

■

<Voice>: Highlights the human voice.

■

<Music>: Highlights the sound by enhancing the bass and treble.

■

<Wide>: Magnifies the stereo effect by enhancing the left and right sounds.

■

<Echo>: Gives an echo effect.

7. To exit, press the [MENU] button.

[ Notes ]

■

It is recommended to use stereo type output devices (TV, speakers) for better audio effects.

■

The Audio Effect function is transmittable.

■

Audio Effect function is not available in USB Streaming mode. (SC-D362/D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

Player Mode

√Tape

Photo Search Photo Copy Audio Select Audio Effect

Move Select Exit

Player Mode

Back

Photo Search Photo Copy Audio Select

Audio Effect

Move Select Exit

聲聲訊訊效效果果

✤ 聲訊效果功能僅可在 <Player> 模式下操作0 ➥第 19 頁 ✤ 聲訊效果功能可爲儲存在錄影帶中的聲訊訊號提供各種播放效果0

1. 將 [Power]

2. 將 [Mode]

（（電電源源））

開關設定爲 [PLAYER]

（（模模式式））

開關設定爲 [TAPE]

（僅限 SC-D363/D364/ D365/D366）

3. 放入配音後的錄影帶，橙按 [MENU]

4. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

（（確確定定））

按瞿0

（（縮縮放放））

5. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom] Effect>，然後按下 [OK]

6. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

√Sound[1] √Off

MENUOKZOOM

頻道，然後按下 [OK]

■

<Voice>：

■

<Music>：透過增强低音與高音頻率來區分聲音0

■

<Wide>：此功能可透過增强左右音效來放大立體聲效果0

■

<Echo>：提供回聲音效0

7. 按 [MENU]（選單）按瞿以結束0

Off Voic e Music Wide Echo

MENUOKZOOM

附附註註

[

]

■

建議舅使用立體聲類型的輸出裝置（電視機/ 喇叭）以獲得更好的聲訊效果0

■

聲訊效果功能可以傳遞0

■

聲訊效果功能不可在 USB 串流模式中使用0

（僅限 SC-D362/D363/D364/D365/D366）

（（播播放放機機））

（（錄錄影影帶帶））

（（選選單單））

按瞿0

桿以選擇 <Tape>，然後按下 [OK]

（（縮縮放放））

桿以選擇 <Audio

（（確確定定））

按瞿0

（（縮縮放放））

（（確確定定））

桿以選擇聲訊效果

按瞿0

區分出人的聲音0

6666

ENGLISH

Playback

Setting the AV In/Out (SC-D365/D366 only)

✤ AV In/Out function works only in <Player> mode. ➥page 19 ✤ AV In/Out setting enables you to record signals from external sources and

display it on LCD Screen. Also, you can send your video or image to external devices to record or play back.

1. Connect the Camcorder to your VCR or TV with the Multi-AV Cable. ➥pages 64~65

2. Set the [Power] switch to [PLAYER].

3. Set the [Mode] switch to [TAPE]. (SC-D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

4. Turn on the VCR or TV.

5. Insert the blank tape with protection tab closed into the Camcorder.

■

If you want to record from a connected VCR, insert a recorded VHS tape into the VCR.

6. Press the [MENU] button.

■

The menu list will appear.

7. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select <Record>, then press the [OK] button.

8. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select <AV In/Out>, then press the [OK] button.

9. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select <AV In>, <S-Video In> then press the [OK] button.

■

If you want to see the Camcorder picture with a TV, set <AV In/Out> menu to <Out>.

10.To exit, press the [MENU] button.

11.Press the [Start/Stop] button to set the Camcorder to REC PAUSE mode.

■

PAUSE appears.

12.Select the TV program or playback the VHS tape.

13.Press the [Start/Stop] button to start recording.

■

If you want to pause recording for a while, press the [Start/Stop] button again.

14.To stop recording, press the [■ (STOP)] button.

[ Notes ]

■

When recording images from a VCR, playback must be at normal speed, or a gray image will appear on the Camcorder. If <AV In / Out> is set to <AV In> or <S-Video In>, the WindCut Plus will be released.

Player Mode

√Record

Rec Mode Audio Mode WindCut Plus AV In/Out

Player Mode

Rec Mode Audio Mode

WindCut Plus

AV In/Out

播播放放

設設定定

✤ AV In/Out 功能僅可在 <Player> 模式中操作0 ➥第 19 頁 ✤ AV In/Out 設定可讓舅從外部來源錄製訊號，然後在 LCD 螢幕上顯示0

Move Select Exit

Back

Move Select Exit

AV In/Out

（（僅僅限限

SC-D365/D366

））

同時，舅也可以將舅的視訊或影像傳送到外部裝置以進行錄製或播放0

1. 使用 Multi-AV 纜線將攝錄放影機連接到舅的 VCR 或電

視機0 ➥第 64~65 頁

√SP √12Bit √Off √Out

Out AV I n S-Video In

2. 將 [Mode]

3. 將 [Power]

4. 開啓 VCR 或電視機的電源0

5. 將關上保護標籤的空白錄影帶放入攝錄放影機0

6. 按下 [MENU] 按瞿0

7. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

8. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

9. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

MENUOKZOOM

10. 按 [MENU]

11. 按 Start/Stop

12. 選擇電視節目或播放 VHS 錄影帶0

13. 按下 [Start/Stop]

14. 若要停止錄製，請按 [■ (STOP)]

MENUOKZOOM

[

■

（（模模式式））

開關設定爲 [TAPE]

（（電電源源））

開關設定爲 [PLAYER]

■

若舅要從連接的 VCR 進行錄製，請將已錄製的 VHS 錄影帶放入 VCR 內0

■

選單淸單將會顯示0

然後按下 [OK]

Out>，然後按下 [OK]

<S-Video In>，然後按下 [OK]

■

如果舅要在電視上査看攝錄放影機怜面，請將 <AV In/Out> 選單設定爲 <Out>0

（（選選單單

到 REC PAUSE（錄製暫停）模式0

■

PAUSE（暫停）將會顯示0

■

如果舅要暫停錄製一段時間，請再次按 [Start/Stop]

（開始/停止）按瞿0

附附註註

]

在從 VCR 錄製影像時，必須以正常速度播放，否則，攝錄放影機上將會顯示灰色影像0

若將 <AV In / Out> 設定爲 <AV In> 或 <S-Video In>，消除風聲功能將被解除0

（（縮縮放放））

（（確確定定））

按瞿0

（（縮縮放放））

（（確確定定））

（（縮縮放放））

）按瞿以結束0

（（開開始始/停停止止））

（（錄錄影影帶帶））

（（播播放放機機））

桿以選擇 <Record>，

桿以選擇 <AV In/

按瞿0

桿以選擇 <AV In>

（（確確定定））

按瞿0

按瞿以將攝錄放影機設定

按瞿以開始錄製0

（（停停止止））

按瞿0

6767

ENGLISH

Digital Still Camera Mode

(SC-D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

數數位位靜靜止止相相機機模模式式（（僅僅限限

SC-D363/D364/ D365/D366

））

Using a Memory Card (Usable Memory Card) (not supplied)

✤ The Memory Card stores and

manages photo images recorded by the Camcorder.

✤ Before inserting or ejecting the

Memory Card, set the [Power] switch to [OFF].

Memory Card Functions

✤ Recording/Viewing Photo Images ✤ Protecting Images from accidental

erasure (except MMC)

Terminals

Protection Tab

Label

MMC/SD (SC-D363/D364/D365/D366)

使使用用記記憶憶賓賓（（可可用用記記憶憶賓賓））((未未提提供供))

Terminals

Memory Stick (PRO) (SC-D365/D366)

Terminals

✤ The Memory Stick Duo does not

have a Protection Tab. When using the Memory Stick Duo, be careful not to edit or delete data by mistake.

✤ Deleting Photo Images stored in

Memory Card

✤ Marking Photo Images with Print

Information

RS MMC/Mini SD

(SC-D363/D364/D365/D366)

Memory Stick Duo, RS MMC or Mini SD should be inserted by using the Adapter (not supplied).

Memory Stick Duo (SC-D365/D366)

✤ Formatting Memory Cards

Inserting a Memory Card

1. Open the Memory Card Cover.

2. Insert the Memory Card.

3. Insert the Memory Card into the Slot until it softly clicks.

4. Close the Memory Card Cover.

Ejecting a Memory Card

1. Open the Memory Card Cover.

2. Slightly push the Memory Card inwards to pop it out.

3. Pull the Memory Card out of the slot and close the Memory Card Cover.

6868

Protection Tab

✤ 記憶賓可以儲存和處理以攝錄放影機

所錄製的相片影像0

✤ 揷入和退出記憶賓之前，先將

（（電電源源））

[Power]

（（關關閉閉

開關設定爲 [OFF]

）0

記記憶憶賓賓功功能能

✤ 錄製/檢視相片影像 ✤ 避免影像被意外刪除（MMC 除外） ✤ Memory Stick Duo 沒有保護標籤0

使用 Memory Stick Duo 時，請小心不要錯誤編輯或刪除資料0

✤ 刪除儲存在記憶賓中的相片影像 ✤ 爲相片影像標記列印資訊 ✤ 格式化記憶賓

揷揷入入記記憶憶賓賓

1. 打開記憶賓蓋0

2. 揷入記憶賓0

3. 將記憶賓揷入揷槽中直到輕輕賓入到

位0

4. 關閉記憶賓蓋0

退退出出記記憶憶賓賓

1. 打開記憶賓蓋0

2. 輕輕地將記憶賓向內推使央彈出0

3. 將記憶賓拉出揷槽橙關閉記憶賓蓋0

DCIM

100 SSDVC DCAM 0001 DCAM 0002

101SSDVC

. . . .

MSAMSUNG

SSMOV

100SSMOV

ENGLISH

File number

Folder number

000-0000

Digital Still Camera Mode

(SC-D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

數數位位靜靜止止相相機機模模式式

（（僅僅限限

SC-D363/D364/ D365/D366

））

[ Notes ]

■

Do not apply excessive force when you insert/eject the Memory Card.

■

Do not turn the power off while recording, loading, erasing a photo image or formatting the Memory Card.

■

Please turn the power off before you insert or eject the Memory Card to avoid losing data.

■

Do not place the Memory Card near a strong electro-magnetic device.

■

Do not allow metal substances to come in contact with the terminals on the Memory Card.

■

Do not bend, drop or apply strong shock to Memory Card.

■

After pulling the Memory Card out from the camcorder, keep the Memory Cards in a soft case to prevent static shock.

■

The data stored on the Memory Card may be changed or lost as a result of misuse, static electricity, electric noise or repair. Save important images separately. Samsung is not responsible for data loss due to misuse.

■

RS-MMC, Mini SD (SC-D363/D364/D365/D366) or Memory Stick Duo type (SC-D365/D366 only) should be inserted by using the Adaptor (not supplied).

Structure of Folders and Files on the Memory Card

✤ The photo images that you recorded are

saved in JPEG file format on the Memory Card.

✤ The moving images that you recorded

are saved in MPEG4 file format on the Memory Card.

✤ Each file has a file number and all files

are assigned to a folder.

- A file number from DCAM0001 is sequentially assigned to each recorded image.

- Each folder is numbered from 100SSDVC and recorded on the Memory Card.

Image Format Photo Image

■

Images are compressed in JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group) format.

■

The picture size is 800x600 (Tape Capture 640x480).

Moving Image

■

Images are compressed in MPEG 4 (Moving Picture Experts Group) format.

■

The picture size is 720x480.

附附註註

[

]

■

請勿在揷入/退出記憶賓時過度用力0

■

請勿在錄製/ 載入/ 刪除相片影像或格式化記憶賓時關閉電源0

■

請勿在揷入或退出記憶賓之前關閉電源以免遺失資料0

■

請勿將記憶賓放置在强大的電磁裝置附近0

■

請勿讓金屬物質接觸到記憶賓上的端子0

■

請不要將記憶賓彎曲/ 掉落或使央受到强大的衝撞0

■

從攝錄放影機拉出記憶賓後，將記憶賓存放在軟盒中以防止靜電損害0

■

儲存在記憶賓的資料可能會由於誤用/ 靜電/ 電源筮訊或維修，而變更或遺失0 將重要的影像分開儲存0 Samsung 將不負責由於誤用所造成的資料遺失0

■

RS-MMC/ Mini SD (SC-D363/D364/D365/D366)或 Memory Stick Duo 類型（僅限 SC-D365/D366）必須使用配接器揷入（未提供）0

記記憶憶賓賓中中的的資資料料夾夾與與圭圭案案結結構構

✤ 舅所錄製的相片影像則會以 JPEG 圭

案格式儲存在記憶賓上0

✤ 舅所錄製的動態影像則會以 MPEG4

圭案格式儲存在記憶賓上0

✤ 舅個圭案都有一個圭案編號，橙且所

有圭案將會指定到資料夾0

- 從 DCAM0001 開始的圭案編號將

會指定給每個已錄製的影像0

- 將以 100SSDVC 開始爲每個資料夾

編號，然後再錄製到記憶賓上0 影像格式

相相片片影影像像

■

影像以 JPEG（Joint Photographic Experts Group，聯合影像專家群組）格式進行壓縮0

■

怜面大小爲 800x600（拍攝錄影帶 640x480）0

動動態態影影像像

■

影像以 MPEG 4（Moving Picture Experts Group，動態視訊專家小組）格式進行壓縮0

■

怜面大小爲 720x4800

6969

ENGLISH

Digital Still Camera Mode

(SC-D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

數數位位靜靜止止相相機機模模式式

（（僅僅限限

SC-D363/D364/ D365/D366

））

Selecting the Memory Type (SC-D366 only)

✤ The Memory Type setting works in <Player>/<M.Cam>/<M.Player>

modes. ➥page 19 (SC-D366: 32MB)

✤ Images can be stored and played back using (Int. Memory), or on a

Memory Card. Hence, set the memory type before storing and playing back images.

1. Set the [Power] switch to [CAMERA] or

[PLAYER].

2. Set the [Mode] switch to [TAPE] or [MEMORY].

3. Press the [MENU] button.

■

The menu list will appear.

4. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select <Memory>, then press the [OK] button.

5. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select <Memory Type>, then press the [OK] button.

6. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select <Int. Memory> or <Memory Card>, then press the [OK] button.

7. To exit, press the [MENU] button.

[ Note ]

■

You can directly access the Memory Type function using the [QUICK MENU] button. ➥page 20

M.Cam Mode

√Memory

Memory Type Photo Quality File No.

Move Select Exit

M.Cam Mode

Back Memory Type

Photo Quality File No.

Move Select Exit

選選擇擇記記憶憶體體類類型型（（僅僅限限

SC-D366)

✤ 記憶體類型設定可在 <Player>/<M.Cam>/<M.Player> 模式下操作0

➥第 19 頁(SC-D366: 32MB)

✤ 影像可使用內建記憶體（內部記憶體）或記憶賓來儲存和播放0

因此，在儲存和播放影像之前，必須先設定記憶體類型0

1. 將 [Power]

√Memory Card √Super Fine √Series

MENUOKZOOM

2. 將 [Mode]

3. 按下 [MENU] 按瞿0

4. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

Int. Memory Memory Card

MENUOKZOOM

5. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

6. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

7. 按 [MENU]

附附註註

[

]

■

舅可以使用 [QUICK MENU]

（（電電源源））

開關設定爲 [CAMERA] 或

（（播播放放機機））

[PLAYER]

[MEMORY]

■

選單淸單將會顯示0

<Memory>，然後按下 [OK]

<Memory Type>，然後按下 [OK] (

（（模模式式））

開關設定爲 [TAPE]

（（記記憶憶賓賓））

（（縮縮放放））

桿以選擇

（（確確定定））

桿以選擇

（（錄錄影影帶帶））

按瞿0

確確定定））

按瞿0

<Int. Memory>或 <Memory Card>，然後按下

（（確確定定））

[OK]

按瞿0

（（選選單單））

按瞿以結束0

（（快快速速選選單單））

按瞿直接存取記憶體類型功能0

➥第 20 頁

或

7070

ENGLISH

Digital Still Camera Mode

(SC-D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

數數位位靜靜止止相相機機模模式式

（（僅僅限限

SC-D363/D364/ D365/D366

））

Selecting the Photo Quality

✤ Photo Quality function works in both <Player> and <M.Cam> modes.

➥page 19

✤ You can select the quality of a photo image to be recorded.

Select the Image Quality

1. Set the [Power] switch to [CAMERA] or [PLAYER].

2. If the [Power] switch is set to [CAMERA] mode, set the [Mode] switch to [MEMORY]. If the [Power] switch is set to [PLAYER] mode, set the [Mode] switch to [TAPE].

3. Press the [MENU] button.

■

The menu list will appear.

4. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select <Memory>, then press the [OK] button.

5. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select <Photo Quality>, then press the [OK] button.

6. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select desired image quality (Super Fine, Fine, Normal), then press the [OK] button.

7. To exit, press the [MENU] button.

■

The selected icon is displayed.

Number of Images on the Memory Card

QUALITY

<Fine>

The actual number of images that you can record varies depending on the nature of the subject to be recorded.

[ Notes ]

■

You can directly access the Photo Quality function using the [QUICK MENU] button. ➥page 20

■

The above approximation is based on a 8MB Memory Card under normal recording conditions.

■

The number of images that can be stored on a Memory Card depends on various conditions.

■

Photo images (JPEG) can be stored in the memory card up to 20,000 files

8MB

Approx. 34

Approx. 45

Approx. 74

16MB

Approx. 68

Approx. 90

Approx. 148

M.Cam Mode

√Memory

Memory Type Photo Quality File No.

Move Select Exit

M.Cam Mode

Back

Memory Type

Photo Quality

File No.

Move Select Exit

選選擇擇相相片片品品質質

✤ 相片品質功能可在 <Player> 和 <M.Cam> 模式下操作0 ➥第 19 頁 ✤ 舅可以選擇要錄製的相片影像品質0

選選擇擇影影像像品品質質

1. 將 [Power]

2. 如果 [Power]

3. 按下 [MENU] 按瞿0

4. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

√Memory Card √Super Fine √Series

MENUOKZOOM

5. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

6. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

7. 按 [MENU]

記記憶憶賓賓中中的的影影像像張張數數

Super Fine Fine Normal

MENUOKZOOM

附附註註

[

]

■

舅可以使用 [QUICK MENU]

➥第 20 頁

■

以上的大約數字乃根據 8MB 記憶賓在正常錄製情況下所得的結果0

■

可儲存在記憶賓上的相片張數將視各種情況而定0

■

相片影像 (JPEG) 可在記憶賓中儲存多達 20,000 個圭案0

<Super Fine>（超精細）

可錄製的實際影像張數將視要錄製的主體性質而定0

（（電電源源））

開關設定爲 [CAMERA] 或

（（播播放放機機））

[PLAYER]

請將 [Mode]

（（記記憶憶賓賓））

如果 [Power]

（（播播放放機機））

（（錄錄影影帶帶））

[TAPE]

■

選單淸單將會顯示0

（（電電源源））

開關設定爲 [CAMERA] 模式，

（（模模式式））

開關設定爲 [MEMORY]

（（電電源源））

模式，則將 [Mode]

開關設定爲 [PLAYER]

<Memory>，然後按下 [OK]

Quality>，然後按下 [OK]

像品質（Super Fine

（（正正常常））））

Normal

■

選定的圖示將會顯示0

（（品品質質））

QUALITY

<Fine>（精細）

<Normal>（正常）

（（超超精精細細））

，然後按下 [OK]

（（選選單單））

按瞿以結束0

（（快快速速選選單單））

大約 34 張

大約 45 張

大約 74 張

按瞿直接存取相片品質功能0

（（模模式式））

（（縮縮放放））

桿以選擇

（（確確定定））

（（縮縮放放））

桿以選擇 <Photo

（（確確定定））

（（縮縮放放））

桿以選擇所要的影

Fine

（（確確定定））

8MB

開關設定爲

按瞿0

（（精精細細））//

16MB

大約 68 張

大約 90 張

大約 148 張

按瞿0

7171

ENGLISH

Digital Still Camera Mode

(SC-D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

數數位位靜靜止止相相機機模模式式

（（僅僅限限

SC-D363/D364/ D365/D366

））

Setting the File Number

✤ File Number setting works only in <M.Cam> mode. ➥page 19 ✤ File Numbers are given to images in the order they were recorded

when they are stored on the Memory Card.

✤ File numbers may be set as follows:

- <Series> : When there are existing files, the new image will be

- <Reset> : When there are no files stored on the Memory Card,

1. Set the [Power] switch to the [CAMERA].

2. Set the [Mode] switch to [MEMORY].

3. Press the [MENU] button.

■

The menu list will appear.

4. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select <Memory>, then press the [OK] button.

5. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select <File No.>, then press the [OK] button.

6. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select desired option (Series or Reset), then press the [OK] button.

7. To exit, press the [MENU] button.

named as the next number in the sequence.

the file numbering starts from 0001.

M.Cam Mode

√Memory

Memory Type Photo Quality File No.

Move Select Exit

M.Cam Mode

Back

Memory Type Photo Quality

File No.

Move Select Exit

設設定定圭圭案案編編號號

✤ 圭案編號設定僅可在 <M.Cam> 模式下操作0 ➥第 19 頁 ✤ 將爲影像提供圭案編號以便在儲存到記憶賓上時記錄0 ✤ 圭案編號可設定如下：

- <Series>：當存在現有圭案時，新影像將會按下一個數字順序命

名0

- <Reset>：當記憶賓中沒有已儲存的圭案時，圭案的編號將從

0001 開始0

（（電電源源））

開關設定爲 [CAMERA]0

（（模模式式））

（（記記憶憶賓賓））

■

選單淸單將會顯示0

<Memory>，然後按下 [OK]

<File No.>，然後按下 [OK]

項（（Series 或或Reset）），然後按下 [OK]

開關設定爲 [MEMORY]

（（選選單單））

按瞿以結束0

（（縮縮放放））

（（確確定定））

（（縮縮放放））

（（確確定定））

（（縮縮放放））

桿以選擇

桿以選擇所要的選

按瞿0

（（確確定定））

桿以選擇

按瞿0

√Memory Card √Super Fine √Series

MENUOKZOOM

Series Reset

MENUOKZOOM

1. 將 [Power]

2. 將 [Mode]

3. 按下 [MENU] 按瞿0

4. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

5. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

6. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

7. 按 [MENU]

7272

ENGLISH

Digital Still Camera Mode

(SC-D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

數數位位靜靜止止相相機機模模式式

（（僅僅限限

SC-D363/D364/ D365/D366

））

Taking a Photo Image (JPEG) on the Memory Card

✤ You may take photo images while in <M.Cam> mode and store the

images on the Memory Card. ➥page 19

✤ You can take photo images using the remote control.

(SC-D364/D366 only)

✤ Audio will not be recorded with a photo image on to the Memory

Card.

1. Set the [Power] switch to [CAMERA].

2. Set the [Mode] switch to [MEMORY].

3. After framing your object to record, fully press the [PHOTO] button to take the picture.

■

The picture is taken and saved into the Memory Card within a few seconds.

■

Taking another picture within this interval is not possible.

■

The < time it takes to save the image.

[ Notes ]

■

Photo images are saved in the Memory Card in an 800x600 format.

■

The number of photo images that can be stored

> indicator appears during the

√√√√√√

depends on the quality of the image.

拍拍攝攝記記憶憶賓賓上上的的相相片片影影像像

(JPEG)

✤ 舅可以在 <M.Cam> 模式下拍攝相片影像，橙將影像儲存在記憶賓中0

➥第 19 頁

✤ 舅可以使用遙控器拍攝相片影像（僅限 SC-D364/D366）0 ✤ 聲訊將不會隨著相片影像錄製到記憶賓中0

1. 將 [Power]

2. 將 [Mode]

3. 係住要錄製的物體後，完全按下 [PHOTO]

（（電電源源））

開關設定爲 [CAMERA]0

（（模模式式））

開關設定爲 [MEMORY]

（（記記憶憶賓賓））

（（相相片片））

瞿以拍攝相片0

■

相片將在數秒內拍攝，然後儲存在記憶賓內0

■

舅不可能在儲存相片期間拍攝癩一張相片0

■

> 指示器會在拍攝時出現以便儲存影

√√√√√√

像0

附附註註

[

]

■

相片影像可以 800x600 格式儲存在記憶體內0

■

可儲存相片影像的張數取決於影像的品質0

1min

7373

按

ENGLISH

REV FWD

S.SHOW MULTI DISP.

Digital Still Camera Mode

(SC-D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

數數位位靜靜止止相相機機模模式式

（（僅僅限限

SC-D363/D364/ D365/D366

））

Viewing Photo Images (JPEG)

✤ This function works only in <M.Player> mode. ➥page 19

You can play back and view photo images recorded on the Memory Card.

✤ Be sure that the <M.Play Select> is set to <Photo> in the Menu. ➥page 80

1. Set the [Power] switch to [PLAYER].

2. Set the [Mode] switch to [MEMORY].

■

The last recorded image appears. If there are no recorded images on the Memory Card, <No

image!> is displayed.

To view a Single Image

œœœœ/√√√√

Using the [ photo image.

■

To view a Slide Show

Press the [√√/❙❙ (S.SHOW)] button.

■

To stop the slide show, press the [√√/❙❙ (S.SHOW)] button again.

To view the Multi Display

To view six stored images on single screen, press the [■ (MULTI DISP.)] button.

■

To return to single playback mode, press the [■ (MULTI DISP.)] button again.

■

[ Notes ]

■

Any large sized image taken with another device will be displayed as a thumbnail image.

■

To display the previous six images, press and hold the [ about 3 seconds.

■

To display the next six images, press the [ seconds.

■

You can access <Delete>, <Delete All>, <Protect> or <Print Mark> functions in Multi Display view mode, using the [QUICK MENU] button.

7474

(REV/FWD)] buttons, search for the desired

To view the next image: press the [ To view the previous image: press the [ Keep pressing [ an image quickly.

All images will be played back consecutively for 2~3 seconds each. The <Slide> is displayed. The Slide Show will start from the current picture.

A selection mark [ Press the [

Selected picture is displayed in full screen.

√√√√

(FWD)] or [

œœœœ √√√√

œœœœ/√√√√

(REV/FWD)] button to select an image.

√√√√

(FWD)] button.

œœœœ

(REV)] button.

œœœœ

(REV)] to search for

] appears under the image.

√√√√

(FWD)] button for about 3

œœœœ

(REV)] button for

œœ

100-0007

√√

檢檢視視相相片片影影像像

✤ 此功能僅可在 <M.Player> 模式下操作0 ➥第 19 頁

舅可以播放和檢視錄製在記憶賓內的相片影像0

✤ 確保將選單中的 <M.Play Select> 設定爲 <Photo>0 ➥第 80 頁

2/46Slide

800x600

100-0002

(JPEG)

（（電電源源））

將 [Power]

若若要要檢檢視視單單一一影影像像

œœœœ/√√√√

使用 [ 片影像0

■

若要檢視下一個影像：按下 [

■

若要檢視上一個影像：按下[

■

按住 [ 搜尋某個影像0

若若要要檢檢視視連連續續放放映映

按下 [√√/❙❙ (S.SHOW)]

■

所有影像將連續各播放 2~3 秒鐘0

■

7/25

< Slide>

片開始0

若要停止連續放映，請再次按下 [√√/❙❙(S.SHOW)] 映映））

按瞿0

（（模模式式））

將 [Mode]

■

最後錄製的影像將會顯示0 如果記憶賓內沒有已錄製的影像，<No image!> 將會顯示0

（（倒倒退退/前前進進））

(REV/FWD)]

√√√√

（（前前進進））

(FWD)]

（（連連續續放放映映））

（（幻幻燈燈片片））

將會顯示0 _ 連續放映將會從目前相

開關設定爲 [PLAYER]

開關設定爲 [MEMORY]

按瞿，搜尋所要的相

√√√√

(FWD)]

œœœœ

(REV)]

œœœœ

或 [

(REV)]

按瞿0

若若要要檢檢視視多多顯顯示示

√

若要在單一螢幕上檢視六個儲存的影像，請按下

[■ (MULTI DISP.)]

■

œœœœ/√√√√

選擇標記 [

(REV/FWD)]

■

按下 [

若要返回單一播放模式，請再次按下 [■ (MULTI DISP.)]

■

選定的相片將以全螢幕顯示0

附附註註

[

]

■

任何以其他裝置拍攝的大型影像將顯示爲縮圖影像0

■

若要顯示之前的六個影像，請按住 [

■

若要顯示之後的六個影像，請按住 [

■

舅可以使用 [QUICK MENU] <Delete>/ <Delete All>/ <Protect>或 <Print Mark>功能0

（（多多顯顯示示））

œœœœ √√√√

（（倒倒退退/前前進進））

œœœœ √√√√

（（快快速速選選單單））

按瞿0

] 將出現在影像下面0

按瞿以選擇影像0

（（多多顯顯示示））

（（倒倒退退））

(REV)]

(FWD)]

按瞿來存取多顯示檢視模式中的

（（前前進進））

按瞿約 3 秒鐘0

（（播播放放機機））

（（記記憶憶賓賓））

（（前前進進））

（（倒倒退退））

（（連連續續放放

按瞿0

以快速

0 0

ENGLISH

Digital Still Camera Mode

(SC-D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

數數位位靜靜止止相相機機模模式式

（（僅僅限限

SC-D363/D364/ D365/D366

））

Protection from accidental Erasure

✤ The Protection function works only in <M.Player> mode. ➥page 19 ✤ You can protect important images from accidental erasure.

If you execute format, all images including protected images will be erased.

1. Set the [Power] switch to [PLAYER].

2. Set the [Mode] switch to [MEMORY].

■

The last recorded image appears.

■

If there are no recorded images on the Memory Card, <No image!> is displayed.

3. Using the [

œœœœ/√√√√

(REV/FWD)] buttons, search for

the photo image that you want to protect.

4. Press the [MENU] button.

■

The menu list will appear.

5. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select <Memory>, then press the [OK] button.

6. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select <Protect>, then press the [OK] button.

7. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select <On>, then press the [OK] button.

8. To exit, press the [MENU] button.

■

The protection ( ) icon is displayed.

[ Notes ]

■

You can directly access the Protection function is available simply using the [QUICK MENU].

➥page 20

■

If the write protection tab on the Memory Card is set to LOCK, you cannot set image protection.

M.Player Mode

√Memory

Memory Type M.Play Select Delete Delete All Protect Print Mark

†

Move Select Exit

M.Player Mode

Back

Memory Type M.Play Select Delete Delete All

Protect

Print Mark

†

Move Select Exit

√

保保護護以以防防止止意意外外刪刪除除

✤ 保護功能僅可在 <M.Player> 模式下操作0 ➥第 19 頁 ✤ 舅可以保護重要的影像以防止意外刪除0

若舅將攝錄放影機格式化，所有影像包括受保護的影像將被刪除0

2/46

√Memory Card √Photo

√Off

MENUOKZOOM

2/46

Off On

MENUOKZOOM

2/46

800x600

100-0002

1. 將 [Power]

2. 將 [Mode]

3. 使用 [

4. 按下 [MENU] 按瞿0

5. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

6. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

7. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

8. 按 [MENU]

附附註註

[

■

（（電電源源））

開關設定爲 [PLAYER]

（（模模式式））

■

最後錄製的影像將會顯示0

■

如果記憶賓內沒有已錄製的影像，<No image!>

開關設定爲 [MEMORY]

將會顯示0

œœœœ/√√√√

(REV/FWD)]

（（倒倒退退/前前進進））

按瞿，搜尋

舅要保護的相片影像0

■

選單淸單將會顯示0

（（縮縮放放））

桿以選擇

<Memory>，然後按下 [OK]

<Protect>，然後按下 [OK]

後按下 [OK]

■

舅可以使用 [QUICK MENU] 取保護功能0 ➥第 20 頁若記憶賓上的寫入保護標籤設定爲鎖定，舅就不能

（（確確定定））

（（選選單單））

保護 ( ) 圖示將會顯示0

]

（（確確定定））

（（縮縮放放））

（（確確定定））

（（縮縮放放））

按瞿0

按瞿以結束0

（（快快速速選選單單））

按瞿0

桿以選擇

按瞿0

桿以選擇 <On>，然

設定影像保護0

（（播播放放機機））

（（記記憶憶賓賓））

按瞿直接存

7575

ENGLISH

Digital Still Camera Mode

(SC-D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

數數位位靜靜止止相相機機模模式式

（（僅僅限限

SC-D363/D364/ D365/D366

））

Deleting Photo Images and Moving Images

✤ The Delete function works only in <M.Player> mode. ➥page 19 ✤ You can erase the photo images and moving images recorded on the

Memory Card.

✤ If you want to delete protected images, you must first deactivate the

image protection.

刪刪除除相相片片影影像像和和動動態態影影像像

✤ 刪除功能僅可在 <M.Player> 模式下操作0 ➥第 19 頁 ✤ 舅可以刪除錄製在記憶賓內的相片影像和動態影像0 ✤ 若舅要刪除受保護的影像，必須先關閉影像保護功能0 ✤ 所刪除的影像將無法恢復0

✤ An image which has been deleted cannot be recovered.

1. Set the [Power] switch to [PLAYER].

2. Set the [Mode] switch to [MEMORY].

■

The last recorded image appears.

■

If there are no recorded images on the Memory Card, <No image!> is displayed.

3. Using the [

4. Press the [MENU] button.

5. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select

6. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select

7. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select <Yes> or

œœœœ/√√√√

(REV/FWD)] buttons, search for

the photo image that you want to delete.

■

The menu list will appear.

<Memory>, then press the [OK] button.

<Delete>, then press the [OK] button.

■

A message <Do you want to delete?> is displayed.

<No>, then press the [OK] button.

M.Player Mode

√Memory

Memory Type

M.Play Select

Delete

Delete All

Protect

Print Mark

M.Player Mode

Back

Memory Type M.Play Select

Delete

Delete All Protect Print Mark

√Memory Card √Photo

√Off

†

Move Select Exit

†

Move Select Exit

Do you want to delete?

Yes

8. To exit, press the [MENU] button.

Previous Next

2/46

MENUOKZOOM

2/46

MENUOKZOOM

2/46

800x600

100-0002

1. 將 [Power]

2. 將 [Mode]

（（電電源源））

開關設定爲 [PLAYER]

（（模模式式））

■

最後錄製的影像將會顯示0

■

如果記憶賓內沒有已錄製的影像，<No image!>

開關設定爲 [MEMORY]

將會顯示0

3. 使用 [

œœœœ/√√√√

(REV/FWD)]

（（倒倒退退/前前進進））

舅要刪除的相片影像0

4. 按下 [MENU] 按瞿0

■

選單淸單將會顯示0

5. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

（（縮縮放放））

桿以選擇

<Memory>，然後按下 [OK]（確定）按瞿0

6. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

<Delete>，然後按下 [OK]（確定）按瞿0

■

一則 <Do you want to delete?> 訊息將會顯示0

7. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom] <No>，然後按下 [OK]

8. 按 [MENU]

（（選選單單））

（（縮縮放放））

（（確確定定））

按瞿以結束0

桿以選擇

桿以選擇 <Yes> 或

按瞿0

（（播播放放機機））

（（記記憶憶賓賓））

按瞿，搜尋

7676

ENGLISH

Digital Still Camera Mode

(SC-D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

數數位位靜靜止止相相機機模模式式

（（僅僅限限

SC-D363/D364/ D365/D366

））

Deleting All Images at Once

6. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select <Delete All>, then press the [OK] button.

■

A message <Do you want to delete all?> is displayed.

7. Move the [Zoom] lever to the up or down to select <Yes> or <No>, then press the [OK] button.

8. To exit, press the [MENU] button.

[ Notes ]

■

You can directly access the Delete function using the [QUICK MENU]. ➥page 20

■

When there is no stored picture on the Memory Card, the message <No image!> will be displayed.

■

If an erroneous image file is found on the Memory Card, the

M.Player Mode

Back

Memory Type M.Play Select Delete

Delete All

Protect Print Mark

†

Move Select Exit

Do you want to delete all?

message <Memory Card Error !> will be displayed. It may be caused by copying images from different digital devices.

■

Formatting the Memory Card will delete all the stored images.

➥page 78

■

To protect important pictures from accidental deletion, activate the image protection. ➥page 75

■

Deleting all files using the <Delete All> menu may take a while. To delete all files much faster, format the Memory Card after backing up the files into another storage device.

2/46

立立卽卽刪刪除除所所有有影影像像

6. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom] All>，然後按下 [OK]

■

一則 <Do you want to delete all?> 訊息將會顯

（（縮縮放放））

（（確確定定））

桿以選擇 <Delete

按瞿0

示0

MENUOKZOOM

2/46

800x600

Yes

100-0002

附附註註

[

]

■

舅可以使用 [QUICK MENU]

➥第 20 頁

■

若記憶賓上沒有儲存的相片，一則 <No image!> 訊息將會顯示0

■

若在記憶賓上胥到錯誤的影像圭案，一則 <Memory Card Error !>訊息將會顯示0 這可能是由於從不同的數位裝置複製影像所造成0

■

格式化記憶賓將刪除所有儲存的影像0 ➥第 78 頁

■

若要防止重要的相片意外被刪除，必須啓動影像保護0 ➥第 75 頁

■

使用 <Delete All> 選單來刪除所有圭案可能需要一段時間0 若要更快刪除所有圭案，請將圭案備略到其他儲存裝置之後才格式化

<No>，然後按下 [OK]

8. 按 [MENU]

（（選選單單））

（（快快速速選選單單））

7. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

（（縮縮放放））

桿以選擇 <Yes> 或

（（確確定定））

按瞿0

按瞿以結束0

按瞿直接存取刪除功能0

記憶賓0

7777

ENGLISH

Digital Still Camera Mode

(SC-D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

數數位位靜靜止止相相機機模模式式

（（僅僅限限

SC-D363/D364/ D365/D366

））

Formatting a Memory Card

✤ The Format function works only in <M.Player> mode. ➥page 19 ✤ You can use the Format functions to completely delete all images and

options on the Memory Card, including protected images.

✤ The Format function restores the Memory Card to its initial state.

Attention

✤ If you execute the Format function, all images will

be erased completely and erased images cannot be recovered.

1. Set the [Power] switch to [PLAYER].

2. Set the [Mode] switch to [MEMORY].

3. Press the [MENU] button.

■

The menu list will appear.

4. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select <Memory>, then press the [OK] button.

5. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select <Format>, then press the [OK] button.

6. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select desired option (Int. Memory or Memory Card), then press the [OK] button. (SC-D366 only)

■

If you select <Int. Memory> or <Memory Card>, a message <All files will be deleted! Do you want to format?> is displayed.

7. Move the [Zoom] lever to the up or down to select <Yes>, then press the [OK] button.

■

<Complete!> is displayed when the format is completed.

8. To exit, press the [MENU] button.

[ Notes ]

■

If you execute the Format function, all photo images/moving images will be erased completely and erased photo images/moving images cannot be recovered.

■

Formatting the Memory Card using a different device will cause Memory Card read errors.

■

Do not turn the power off in the middle of the formatting.

■

A Memory Card with the protection tab set to save will not be formatted. ➥page 68

■

Do not format the Memory Card on a PC. <Not formatted !> message may appear if a Memory Card formatted on a PC is inserted.

7878

M.Player Mode

√Memory

Memory Type M.Play Select Delete Delete All Protect Print Mark

†

Move Select Exit

M.Player Mode

†

Back

Copy to

Format

Move Select Exit

All files will be deleted ! Do you want to format?

Yes

格格式式化化記記憶憶賓賓

✤ 格式化功能僅可在 <M.Player> 模式下操作0 ➥第 19 頁 ✤ 舅可以使用格式化功能來刪除記憶賓上的所有影像和選項，包括受保護的

影像0

✤ 格式化功能會將記憶賓還原爲起始狀態0

2/46

√Memory Card √Photo

√Off

MENUOKZOOM

2/46

Back Int. Memory Memory Card

MENUOKZOOM

2/46

800x600

100-0002

注注意意

✤ 若舅執行格式化功能，所有影像將會完全被刪除，且刪

除的影像將無法恢復0

1. 將 [Power]

2. 將 [Mode]

3. 按下 [MENU] 按瞿0

4. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

5. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

6. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

7. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

8. 按 [MENU]

附附註註

[

■

（（電電源源））

開關設定爲 [PLAYER]

（（模模式式））

開關設定爲 [MEMORY]

■

選單淸單將會顯示0

然後按下 [OK]

<Int. Memory> 或 Memory Card>，然後按下 [OK]

（（確確定定））

按瞿0（僅限 SC-D366）

■

若舅選擇 <Int. Memory> 或 <Memory Card>，一則 <All files will be deleted! Do you want to format?> 訊息將會顯示0

（（確確定定））

按下 [OK]

■

在完成格式化時，<Complete!> 訊息將會顯示0

（（選選單單））

]

若舅執行格式化功能，所有相片/動態影像將會完全被刪除，且刪除的相片/動態影像將無法恢復0 使用其他裝置來格式化記憶賓將造成記憶賓讀取錯誤0 請勿在格式化期間關閉電源0 保護標籤設定爲儲存的記憶賓將不會被格式化0 ➥第 68 頁請勿在電腦上格式化記憶賓0 若舅在電腦上格式化記憶賓，一則 <Not formatted !> 訊息將會顯示0

（（確確定定））

按瞿0

按瞿以結束0

（（縮縮放放））

按瞿0

（（縮縮放放））

按瞿0

（（縮縮放放））

（（播播放放機機））

（（記記憶憶賓賓））

桿以選擇 <Memory>，

桿以選擇 <Format>，

桿以選擇所要的選項

桿以選擇 <Yes>，然後

ENGLISH

ICK

ENU

MSAMSUNG

SSMOV

100SSMOV

Digital Still Camera Mode

(SC-D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

數數位位靜靜止止相相機機模模式式

（（僅僅限限

SC-D363/D364/ D365/D366

））

Recording a Moving Images (MPEG) on the Memory Card

✤ You may record moving images while in <M.Cam> mode and store the images

on a Memory Card. ➥page 19

✤ You can record moving images with audio on a Memory

Card.

✤ The screen format of the moving image to be recorded is

720x480.

Saving Moving Images onto a Memory Card

1. Set the [Power] switch to [CAMERA].

2. Set the [Mode] switch to [MEMORY].

3. Press the [Start/Stop] button, the moving images are recorded on the Memory Card in MPEG4.

■

You can record a photo image on Memory Card by pressing the [PHOTO] button instead of the [Start/Stop] button.

4. Press the [Start/Stop] button to stop the recording.

[ Notes ]

■ Support memory cards ranging up to 4GB and a movie can

be recorded up to 2GB of file size.

■ MPEG files can be stored in the memory card up to 1,000

files.

■ [MENU] button and [OK] button are not available while

recording a moving image. To use [MENU] button and [OK] button, stop recording. Recording a moving image is not available when a MENU or QUICK MENU is displayed on the screen. To start recording, press the [MENU] button to make the memu disappear.

■ Before using the Recording a moving image function, check

whether the Memory Card is inserted into the Camcorder.

■ Moving images that you recorded are saved in *.avi (avi 1.0)

file format on the Memory Card.

■ The files that you recorded are saved in a following folder to

the right. (see illustration right)

■ The moving images on a Memory Card are a smaller size

and lower definition than images on tape.

■ The sound is recorded in mono.

■ The following functions are not allowed in <M.Cam> Mode.

DIS (Digital Image Stabilizer), Digital Zoom, Fade, Program AE, Visual Effect, Slow Shutter.

■ While recording on a Memory Card, don’t insert or eject the

■ While recording on a Memory Card, don’t eject the Memory Card or it may break

■ Turning the power off while accessing the Memory Card may damage the data

tape as it may record noise.

the data on the Memory Card or Memory Card itself.

stored on the Memory Card.

3 4

錄錄製製記記憶憶賓賓上上的的動動態態影影像像

√

(MPEG)

✤ 舅可以在 <M.Cam> 模式下錄製動態影像，橙將影像儲存

在記憶賓中0 ➥第 19 頁

✤ 舅可以將動態影像和聲訊錄製到記憶賓上0 ✤ 將錄製的動態影像的螢幕格式爲 720x4800

將將動動態態影影像像儲儲存存到到記記憶憶賓賓上上

1. 將 [Power]

2. 將 [Mode]

3. 按下 [Start/Stop]

4. 按下 [Start/Stop]

[

■ 本攝錄放影機支援高達 4GB 的記憶賓，橙且可以錄製高達

■ MPEG 圭案可在記憶賓中儲存多達 1,000 個圭案0

■ [MENU]

■ 使用錄製動態影像功能之前，請檢査記憶賓是否已揷入攝

■ 舅所錄製的動態影像則會以 *.avi (avi 1.0) 圭案格式儲存在

■ 舅所錄製的圭案將儲存在圖中所示右邊的資料夾中0（參看

■ 記憶賓上的動態影像比錄影帶上的影像具有更小的尺寸和

■ 聲音將以單聲道模式錄製0

■ 以下功能無法在 <M.Cam> 模式中操作0

■ 在錄製到記憶賓時，請勿揷入或退出錄影帶，因爲這可能

■ 在錄製到記憶賓時，請勿退出記憶賓，否則可能損毁記憶

■ 在存取記憶賓時關閉電源，可能損毁儲存在記

（（電電源源））

開關設定爲 [CAMERA]

（（模模式式））

開關設定爲 [MEMORY]

[Start/Stop]

賓上0

（（開開始始/停停止止））

圭案格式錄製到記憶賓上0

■ 舅可以透過按下 [PHOTO]

附附註註

]

（（相相機機））

（（記記憶憶賓賓））

按瞿，動態影像將以 MPEG4

（（相相片片））

按瞿，而非

按瞿，將相片影像錄製到記憶

按瞿以停止錄製0

2GB 圭案大小的影片0

（（選選單單））按按瞿瞿和和

間間不不可可用用00 若若要要使使用用

（（確確定定））按按瞿瞿，，請請停停止止錄錄製製00 錄錄製製動動態態影影像像功功能能在在

單單））或或

QUICK MENU

若要開始錄製，按 [MENU]

（（確確定定））按按瞿瞿在在錄錄製製動動態態影影像像期期

[OK]

（（選選單單））按按瞿瞿和和

[MENU]

（（快快速速選選單單））顯顯示示在在螢螢幕幕上上時時不不可可用用00

（（選選單單））

[OK]

按瞿以使選單消失0

錄放影機0

記憶賓上0

右圖）

更低的淸劉度0

DIS（數位防手震功能）/ Digital Zoom（數位縮放）/ Fade（淡化）/ Program AE（程序自動曝光）/ Visual Effect（視訊效果）/ Slow Shutter（較慢的快門）0

會發出筮音0

賓內的資料或該賓0

憶賓內的資料0

（（選選

7979

ENGLISH

Digital Still Camera Mode

(SC-D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

數數位位靜靜止止相相機機模模式式

（（僅僅限限

SC-D363/D364/ D365/D366

））

Playing the Moving Images (MPEG) on the Memory Card (M.Play Select)

✤ The Moving Images Playback function works only in <M. Player> mode. ➥page 19 ✤ You can play the moving images on the Memory Card. Stereo audio is played

back at the same time.

✤ The playback picture will be of higher quality if it is viewed on

a PC than on a TV.

1. Set the [Power] switch to [PLAYER].

2. Set the [Mode] switch to [MEMORY].

3. Press the [MENU] button.

■

The menu list will appear.

4. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select <Memory>, then press the [OK] button.

5. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select <M.Play Select>, then press the [OK] button.

6. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select <Movie>, then press the [OK] button.

7. To exit the menu, press the [MENU] button.

8. Using the [

9. Press the [√√/❙❙ (PLAY/STILL)] button.

[ Notes ]

■

œœœœ/√√√√

moving image that you want to playback.

■

The moving images recorded on the Memory Card will playback.

■

You can control playback using the [√√/❙❙ (PLAY/STILL)],

œœœœ/√√√√

[

You can directly access the M.Play Select function using the

[QUICK MENU] button. ➥page 20 [MENU] button and [OK] button are not available during moving image playback. To use [MENU] button and [OK] button, stop playback. Moving image playback is not available when a menu or Quick menu is displayed on the screen. To start playback, press the [MENU] button to make it disappear.

There may be broken or mosaic pictures while playing the moving images, but it is not a malfunction. The moving images that you recorded on the Memory Card may not play on other manufacturer’s equipment. The moving images recorded by another Camcorder may not play on this Camcorder. To playback moving images on a PC, the Video Codec (in the CD provided with the camcorder) should be installed.

- You need Microsoft Windows Media Player Version 9 or higher in order to

play moving images on the Memory Card on your PC.

- You can download the Microsoft Windows Media Player with your desired

language from the Microsoft Website, “http://www.microsoft.com/windows/windowsmedia/download/default.asp”.

(REV/FWD)] buttons, search for the

(REV/FWD)], and [■ (STOP)] buttons.

M.Player Mode

√Memory

Memory Type M.Play Select Delete Delete All Protect Print Mark

M.Player Mode

Memory Type

M.Play Select

Delete Delete All Protect

Print Mark

播播放放記記憶憶賓賓上上的的動動態態影影像像

✤ 動態影像播放功能僅可在 <M. Player> 模式下操作0 ➥第 19 頁 ✤ 舅可以播放記憶賓內的動態影像，立體聲音響也將會同時播放0 ✤ 若在電腦上檢視，播放怜面的品質會比在電視上來得高0

2/46

√Memory Card √Photo

√Off

†

Move Select Exit

Back

†

Move Select Exit

MENUOKZOOM

2/46

Photo Movie

MENUOKZOOM

■

若要在電腦上播放動態影像，必須安裝視訊轉碼器（位於攝錄放影機隨附的光勒上）0

- 舅必須擁有 Microsoft Windows Media Player 版本 9 或以上版本，才可在電

腦上播放記憶賓內的動態影像0

- 舅可以從 Microsoft 網站：「http://www.microsoft.com/windows/windowsmedia/download/default.asp」，

下載舅所要的語言版本之 Microsoft Windows Media Player0

1. 將 [Power]

2. 將 [Mode]

3. 按下 [MENU] 按瞿0

4. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

5. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

6. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]（縮放）桿以選擇 <Movie>，然後按

7. 按 [MENU]（選單）按瞿以結束選單0

8. 使用 [

9. 按[√√/❙❙ (PLAY/STILL)]

附附註註

[

■

8080

(MPEG)（（M.Play

（（電電源源））

開關設定爲 [PLAYER]

（（模模式式））

開關設定爲 [MEMORY]

■

選單淸單將會顯示0

（（確確定定））

按下 [OK]

Select>，然後按下 [OK]

（（確確定定））

下 [OK]

œœœœ/√√√√

的動態影像0

■

將播放錄製在記憶賓上的動態影像0

■

舅可以使用 [√√/❙❙ (PLAY/STILL)]

œœœœ/√√√√

[

（（停停止止））

]

舅可以使用 [QUICK MENU]

M.Play 選擇功能0 ➥第 20 頁

（（選選單單））按按瞿瞿和和

[MENU]

不不可可用用00 若若要要使使用用請請停停止止播播放放00 動動態態影影像像播播放放功功能能在在

（（快快速速選選單單））顯顯示示在在螢螢幕幕上上時時不不可可

按按

（（選選單單））按按瞿瞿以以使使央央消消失失00

[MENU]

播放動態影像時會出現破損或馬賽克相片，這橙非故障0 舅錄製在記憶賓上的動態影像也許無法在其他製造商的裝置上播放0 採用其他攝錄放影機所錄製的動態影像可能無法在本攝錄放影機上播放0

按瞿0

(REV/FWD)]

按瞿0

[MENU]

（（縮縮放放））

（（確確定定））

（（倒倒退退/前前進進））

（（播播放放/靜靜止止））

（（倒倒退退/前前進進））

（（快快速速選選單單））

（（確確定定））按按瞿瞿在在動動態態影影像像播播放放期期間間

[OK]

（（選選單單））按按瞿瞿和和

選選擇擇））

（（播播放放機機））

（（記記憶憶賓賓））

桿以選擇 <Memory>，然後

桿以選擇 <M.Play

按瞿0

按瞿，搜尋舅要播放

按瞿0

（（播播放放/靜靜止止））

按瞿/

及 [■ (STOP)]

按瞿直接存取

（（確確定定））按按瞿瞿，，

[OK]

（（選選單單））或或

QUICK

用用00 若若要要開開始始播播放放，，

ENGLISH

Digital Still Camera Mode

(SC-D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

數數位位靜靜止止相相機機模模式式

（（僅僅限限

SC-D363/D364/ D365/D366

））

Recording Still Images from a Cassette

✤ This function works only in <Player> mode. ➥page 19 ✤ You can capture a frame on a tape and save it as a Photo on a

Memory Card.

1. Set the [Power] switch to [PLAYER].

2. Set the [Mode] switch to [TAPE].

3. Play back the cassette.

4. Press the [PHOTO] button.

■

The photo image is recorded on the Memory Card.

■

During the time it takes to save an image, the playback screen is paused and the OSD is displayed. (see illustration to the right)

[ Notes ]

■

Photo images copied from the cassette to the Memory Card are saved in a 640x480 format.

■

Number of images you can save varies depending on the image resolution.

Now copying...

從從錄錄影影帶帶錄錄製製靜靜止止影影像像

✤ 此功能僅可在 <Player> 模式下操作0 ➥第 19 頁 ✤ 舅可以遠取錄影帶上的幀，然後儲存成記憶賓中的相片0

（（電電源源））

開關設定爲 [PLAYER]

（（模模式式））

開關設定爲 [TAPE]

（（相相片片））

■

相片影像已錄製到記憶賓上0

■

在儲存影像期間，播放怜面將暫停，而 OSD 將會顯示0（參看右圖）

]

從錄影帶複製到記憶賓上的靜止影像，將會以 640x480 格式儲存0 舅可儲存的影像張數取決於影像解析度0

按瞿0

2/46

25min

1. 將 [Power]

2. 將 [Mode]

3. 播放錄影帶0

4. 按 [PHOTO]

附附註註

[

■

（（播播放放機機））

（（錄錄影影帶帶））

8181

ENGLISH

Digital Still Camera Mode

(SC-D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

數數位位靜靜止止相相機機模模式式

（（僅僅限限

SC-D363/D364/ D365/D366

））

Copying Still Images from a Cassette to a Memory Card (Photo Copy)

✤ The Photo Copy function works only in

<Player> mode. ➥page 19

✤ You can copy all Still images recorded with the

Photo function from the cassette to a Memory Card.

✤ Rewind the tape to the desired point.

Player Mode

√Tape

Photo Search Photo Copy Audio Select Audio Effect

將將靜靜止止影影像像從從錄錄影影帶帶複複製製到到記記憶憶賓賓（（相相片片複複製製））

√Sound[1] √Off

1. Set the [Power] switch to [PLAYER].

MENUOKZOOM

0:44:38:03

25min

2/46

25min

2. Set the [Mode] switch to [TAPE].

3. Press the [MENU] button.

■

The menu list will appear.

4. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select <Tape>, then press the [OK] button.

5. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select <Photo Copy>, then press the [OK] button.

■

All still images that recorded on a cassette tape will be copied into a Memory Card.

6. The Camcorder automatically performs the still image search to find still images and copy starts.

7. Press the [■ (STOP)] button to stop copying.

■

Copy stops when the cassette is finished or Memory Card is full.

[ Note ]

Still images copied from the cassette to the Memory

Move Select Exit

Player Mode

Back

Photo Search

Photo Copy

Audio Select Audio Effect

Move Select Exit

Photo Copy

Photo searching...

Photo Copy

Now copying...

Card are saved in 640x480 format.

MENUOK

Back Exit

✤ 相片複製

功能僅可在 <Player> 模式下操作0

➥第 19 頁

✤ 舅可以將以相片功能錄製的所有靜止影像，從錄影

帶複製到記憶賓中0

✤ 將錄影帶回轉到所要的點0

1. 將 [Power]

2. 將 [Mode]

3. 按下 [MENU] 按瞿0

4. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

5. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

（（電電源源））

開關設定爲 [PLAYER]

（（模模式式））

開關設定爲 [TAPE]

■

選單淸單將會顯示0

（（縮縮放放））

然後按下 [OK]

（（確確定定））

按瞿0

（（縮縮放放））

<Photo Copy>，然後按下 [OK]

■

所有錄製在錄影帶上的靜止影像將會複製到記憶

（（播播放放機機））

（（錄錄影影帶帶））

桿以選擇 <Tape>，

桿以選擇（（確確定定））

按瞿0

賓0

6. 攝錄放影機將自動執行靜止影像搜尋，以尋胥靜止

影像橙開始複製0

7. 按下 [■ (STOP)]

■

當錄影帶用完或記憶賓已滿時複製將停止0

附附註註

[

]

（（停停止止））

按瞿以停止播放0

從錄影帶複製到記憶賓上的靜止影像，將會以 640x480 格式儲存0

8282

ENGLISH

Digital Still Camera Mode

(SC-D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

數數位位靜靜止止相相機機模模式式

（（僅僅限限

SC-D363/D364/ D365/D366

））

Copying Files from a Memory Card to the Built-in Memory (Copy to) (SC-D366 only)

✤ The Copy to function works only in <M.Player> mode. ➥page 19 ✤ You can copy selected or all images stored in the Memory Card to

the built-in memory.

1. Set the [Power] switch to [PLAYER].

2. Set the [Mode] switch to [MEMORY].

3. Press the [MENU] button.

■

The menu list will appear.

4. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select <Memory>, then press the [OK] button.

5. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select <Copy to>, then press the [OK] button.

6. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select options (Back, This File or All Files), then press [OK] button.

■

To go back to the previous mode, select <Back>.

■

If <This File> or <All Files> is selected, <Now copying…> is displayed and copying

starts.

7. To exit, press the [MENU] button.

M.Player Mode

√Memory

Memory Type M.Play Select Delete Delete All Protect Print Mark

†

Move Select Exit

M.Player Mode

Back Copy to

Format

Previous Next Exit

†

將將圭圭案案從從記記憶憶賓賓複複製製到到內內建建記記憶憶體體（（複複製製到到））

（（僅僅限限 SSCC--DD336666））

✤「複製到」功能僅可在 <M.Player> 模式下操作0 ➥第 19 頁 ✤ 舅可以將選取的影像或所有儲存在記憶賓內的影像複製到內建記憶體0

2/46

√Memory Card √Photo

√Off

MENUOKZOOM

2/46

Back This File All Files

1. 將 [Power]

2. 將 [Mode]

（（電電源源））

開關設定爲 [PLAYER]

（（模模式式））

開關設定爲 [MEMORY]

3. 按下 [MENU] 按瞿0

■

選單淸單將會顯示0

4. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom] <emory>，然後按下 [OK]

5. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

<Copy to>，然後按下 [OK]

6. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

（（

（（返返回回））

Back

（（全全部部圭圭案案））

■

），然後按下 [OK]

若要返回之前模式，請選擇 <Back>0 若選擇了 <This File>或 <All Files>

（（縮縮放放））

/ This File

（（確確定定））

（（本本圭圭案案））

（（確確定定））

<Now copying……> 將會顯示橙開始複製0

7. 按 [MENU]

（（選選單單））

按瞿以結束0

（（播播放放機機））

（（記記憶憶賓賓））

桿以選擇

按瞿0

桿以選擇

按瞿0

桿以選擇選項

或 All Files

按瞿0

，，

8383

ENGLISH

Digital Still Camera Mode

(SC-D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

數數位位靜靜止止相相機機模模式式

（（僅僅限限

SC-D363/D364/ D365/D366

））

Marking Images for Printing (Print Mark)

✤ The Print Mark function works only in <M.Player> mode. ➥page 19 ✤ This Camcorder supports the DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) print format. ✤ You can automatically print images recorded on a Memory Card with a

printer supporting DPOF.

✤ There are 2 ways to make a Print Mark.

- <This File> : You can set a print mark on the photo image displayed on the LCD Screen. It can be set up to 999.

- <All Files> : To print 1 copy each of all of the stored images.

1. Set the [Power] switch to [PLAYER].

2. Set the [Mode] switch to [MEMORY].

■

The last recorded image appears.

3. Using the [

4. Press the [MENU] button.

5. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select

6. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select

7. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select

8. If you select <This File>, move the [Zoom] lever up or

9. To exit, press the [MENU] button.

Removing the Print Mark

To remove all Print Marks select <All Off>. To remove individual file’s Print Mark, select the file and set <This File> to <000>.

[ Notes ]

■

œœœœ/√√√√

the photo image that you want to mark.

■

The menu list will appear.

(REV/FWD)] buttons, search for

<Memory>, then press the [OK] button.

<Print Mark>, then press the [OK] button.

desired option (All Off, This File or All Files), then press the [OK] button.

down to select the quantity, then press the [OK] button.

You can directly access the Print Mark function using the [QUICK MENU]. ➥page 20 If the Print Mark is set to <This File>, you can set the number of copies from <000> to <999>. If the Print Mark is set to <All Files>, you can set the number of copies to <1>. The <All Files> option may require extended operation time depending on the number of stored images. DPOF supported printers are commercially available. Use the USB cable provided with the Camcorder.

8484

M.Player Mode

√Memory

Memory Type M.Play Select Delete Delete All Protect Print Mark

Move Select Exit

M.Player Mode

Back

Memory Type M.Play Select Delete Delete All Protect

Print Mark

Previous Next Exit

√

002

†

標標記記要要列列印印的的影影像像（（列列印印標標記記））

✤ 列印標記功能僅可在 <M.Player> 模式下操作0 ➥第 19 頁 ✤ 攝錄放影機支援 DPOF（數位列印順序格式）列印格式0 ✤ 舅可以使用支援 DPOF 的印表機來自動列印錄製在記憶賓上的影像0 ✤ 製作列印標記的方式有 2 種：

2/46

√Memory Card √Photo

√Off

MENUOKZOOM

2/46

002

All Off This File 002 All Files

2/46

800x600

100-0002

■

若列印標記設定爲 <All Files>，舅可以將略數設定爲 <1>0

■

視儲存的影像張數而定，<All Files> 選項可能需要延長操作時間0

■

DPOF 支援印表機在市面上可買到0

■

使用攝錄放影機隨附的 USB 纜線0

- <This File>：舅可以爲顯示在 LCD 螢幕上的相片影

像設定列印標記0 央可設定多達 999 個0

- <All Files>：爲所有儲存的影像各列印一略0

1. 將 [Power]

2. 將 [Mode]

3. 使用 [

4. 按下 [MENU] 按瞿0

5. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

6. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

7. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

†

8. 若舅選擇了 <This File>，請向上或向下移動

†

9. 按 [MENU]

（（電電源源））

（（模模式式））

■

最後錄製的影像將會顯示0

œœœœ/√√√√

記的相片影像0

■

後按下 [OK]

然後按下 [OK]

（（

All Off

（（全全部部圭圭案案））））

[Zoom]

瞿0

(REV/FWD)]

選單淸單將會顯示0

（（確確定定））

（（確確定定

（（全全部部關關閉閉））//

，然後按下 [OK]

（（縮縮放放））

桿以選擇數量，然後按下 [OK]

（（選選單單））

開關設定爲 [PLAYER]

開關設定爲 [MEMORY]

（（倒倒退退/前前進進））

（（縮縮放放））

桿以選擇 <Memory>，然

按瞿0

（（縮縮放放））

桿以選擇 <Print Mark>，

）按瞿0

（（縮縮放放））

桿以選擇所要的選項

（（本本圭圭案案））

This File

（（確確定定））

按瞿以結束0

移移除除列列印印標標記記

若要移除所有列印標記，請選擇 <All Off>0 若要移除個別圭案的列印標記，請選擇該圭案，然後將

<This File> 設定爲 <000>0

附附註註

[

]

■

舅可以使用 [QUICK MENU] 印標記功能0➥第 20 頁

■

若列印標記設定爲 <This File>，舅可以設定從 <000> 到 <999> 的略數0

（（快快速速選選單單））

（（播播放放機機））（（記記憶憶賓賓））

按瞿，搜尋舅要標

或 All Files

按瞿0

（（確確定定））

按瞿直接存取列

0 0

按

ENGLISH

PictBridge

(SC-D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

Printing Your Pictures – Using the PictBridge

✤ PictBridgeTMfunction works only in <M.Player> mode. ➥page 19 ✤ By connecting the Camcorder to printers with PictBridge support

(sold separately), you can send images from the Memory Card directly to the printer with a few simple operations.

✤ With the PictBridge Support, you can control the printer directly

through your Camcorder in order to print out stored pictures. For direct printing of your stored pictures using the PictBridge function, you must connect your Camcorder to a PictBridge printer using a USB cable.

Connecting To a Printer

1. Turn your printer’s power off.

■

Turn your Camcorder on by setting the [Power] switch to [PLAYER].

2. Set the [Mode] switch to [MEMORY].

3. Press the [MENU] button.

■

The menu list will appear.

4. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select <System>, then press the [OK] button.

5. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select <USB Connect>, then press the [OK] button.

6. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select <Printer>, then press the [OK] button.

■

<Computer> : Connect to a computer.

■

<Printer> : Connect to a printer. (To use the PictBridge function, connect to a printer.)

7. Connect your Camcorder to the printer using the provided USB cable.

8. Turn your printer power on.

■

The PictBridge menu screen appears automatically after a short period.

■

The cursor highlights <Print>.

M.Player Mode

√System

Clock Set Remote Beep Sound USB Connect Language

Move Select Exit

M.Player Mode

Back

Clock Set Remote Beep Sound

USB Connect

Language

Move Select Exit

PictBridge

（（僅僅限限

列列印印相相片片使使用用

SC-D363/D364/D365/D366

PictBridge

–

））

✤ PictBridgeTM功能僅可在 <M.Player> 模式下操作0 ➥第 19 頁 ✤ 透過將攝錄放影機連接到 PictBridge 支援（個別購買）的印表機，可進

行幾個簡單操作，將影像從記憶賓直接傳送到印表機0

✤ 使用PictBridge 支援的印表機，卽可透過攝錄放影機直接控制印表機

以列印出儲存的相片0 若要使用 PictBridge 功能直接列印儲存的相片，舅必須使用 USB 纜線將攝錄放影機連接到 PictBridge 印表機0

連連接接印印表表機機

1. 關閉印表機電源0

2/46

√On √On √Computer √English

MENUOKZOOM

2/46

Computer Printer

MENUOKZOOM

■

透過將 [Power]

（（播播放放機機））

2. 將 [Mode]

3. 按下 [MENU] 按瞿0

■

選單淸單將會顯示0

4. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom] <System>，然後按下 [OK]

5. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom] <USB Connect>，然後按下 [OK]

6. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

<Printer>，然後按下 [OK]

■

<Computer>：連接至電腦0

■

<Printer>：連接至印表機0

（若要使用 PictBridge 功能，請連接至印表機0）

（（電電源源））

開關設定爲 [PLAYER]

來開啓攝錄放影機電源0

（（模模式式））

開關設定爲 [MEMORY]

（（縮縮放放））

（（確確定定））

（（縮縮放放））

（（確確定定））

桿以選擇

按瞿0

桿以選擇

（（確確定定））

桿以選擇

按瞿0

（（記記憶憶賓賓））

按瞿0

7. 使用隨附的 USB 纜線將攝錄放影機連接到印表機0

8. 開啓印表機電源0

■

PictBridge 選單怜面蜈快將會自動顯示0

■

游標反白顯示 <Print>0

8585

ENGLISH

PictBridge

(SC-D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

PictBridge

（（僅僅限限

SC-D363/D364/D365/D366

））

Selecting Images

1. In the <PictBridge> settings menu, press the [ (REV/FWD)] buttons to select an image to print.

œœœœ/√√√√

Setting the Number of Prints

2. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select <Copies>, then press the [OK] button.

3. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to set the number of prints, then press the [OK] button.

Setting the Date/Time Imprint Option

4. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select <Date/Time>, then press the [OK] button.

5. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select the Date/Time display type, then press the [OK] button.

■

Date/Time display type: <Off>, <Date>, <Time>, <Date&Time>

M.Player Mode

Back

Copies

Date/Time

Previous Next

M.Player Mode

Back

Print Copies

Date/Time

Printing Images

Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select <Print>, then press the [OK] button, and selected image files will be printed.

Canceling the Printing

To cancel the image printing, press [OK] button again. The message “Cancel” appears and the image printing will be canceled.

[ Notes ]

■

The Date/Time Imprint Option may not supported by all printers. Check with your printer manufacturer. The <Date/Time> menu cannot be setup if the printer does not support this option.

■

The PictBridgeTMis a registered trademark of CIPA (Camera & Imaging Products Association), an image transfer standard developed by Canon, Fuji, HP, Olympus, Seiko Epson, and Sony.

■

PictBridge supporting printers are commercially available.

■

Use the USB cable provided with the Camcorder.

■

Use the AC power adapter for your Camcorder during PictBridge Direct Printing. Turning your Camcorder off during printing might damage data on the Memory Card.

■

Printing photo images is supported. Moving images are not available for printing.

■

You can set various printing options depending on the printer.

■

Please refer to the user’s manual of the printer for details.

Previous Next

M.Player Mode

Back Print

Copies Date/Time

Previous Next

8686

2/46

Num. 02

100-0002

2/46

Off Date Time Date&Time

100-0002

2/46

100-0002

選選擇擇影影像像

1. 在 <PictBridge> 設定選單中，按下 [œœ/ （（倒倒退退/前前進進））

FWD)]

按瞿以選擇要列印的影像0

√√√√

(REV/

設設定定列列印印略略數數

2. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

然後按下 [OK]

3. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

後按下 [OK]

（（確確定定））

按瞿0

（（縮縮放放））

桿以選擇 <Copies>，

按瞿0

（（縮縮放放））

桿以設定列印略數，然

設設定定日日期期/時時間間壓壓印印選選項項

（（確確定定））

<Date&Time>

（（縮縮放放））

桿以選擇

（（確確定定））

（（縮縮放放））

桿以選擇日期/時間顯示

按瞿0

（（關關閉閉））//

按瞿0

<Date>

4. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

<Date/Time>，然後按下 [OK]

5. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

類型，然後按下 [OK]

■

日期/時間顯示類型： <Off> <Time>

列列印印影影像像

向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

（（確確定定））

下 [OK]

按瞿0

（（縮縮放放））

桿以選擇 <Print>，然後按

取取消消列列印印

若要取消影像列印，請再次按下 [OK] 一則””Cancel

[

■

””（（取取消消））

附附註註

]

日期/時間壓印選項橙不受所有印表機支援0 請洽詢舅的印表機製造商0 若印表機不支援此選項，<Date/Time> 選單可能無法設定0

PictBridgeTM 是 CIPA（Camera & Imaging Products Association，相機與影像産品協會）的註冊商標，是由 Canon/ Fuji/ HP/ Olympus/ Seiko Epson 以及 Sony 所開發影像傳輸標準0 PictBridge 支援的印表機在市面上可買到0

使用攝錄放影機隨附的 USB 纜線0 在 PictBridge 直接列印期間，使用攝錄放影機的交流電源適配器0 在列印期間關閉攝錄放影機電源，可能會損毁記憶賓上的資料0 支援列印相片影像0 不支援列印動態影像0 舅可以設定的各種列印選項視印表機而定0 請參閱印表機使用者手冊以獲得詳細資訊0

訊息將會顯示，而影像列印也將取消0

（（確確定定））

按瞿0

ENGLISH

IEEE 1394 Data Transfer

Transferring IEEE1394 (i.LINK)-DV Standard Data Connections

Connecting to a DV Device (DVD Recorder, Camcorder, etc.)

■

Connecting to other DV standard DV products.

- A standard DV connection is quite simple.

- If a product has a DV jack, you can transfer data by connecting to the DV jack using the correct cable. (not supplied)

!!! Please be careful since there are two types of DV jacks (4pin,

6pin). This Camcorder has a 4pin jack.

■

With a digital connection, video and audio signals are transmitted in digital format, allowing high quality images to be transferred.

Connecting to a PC

■

If you want to transmit data to a PC, you must install an IEEE 1394 add-on card into the PC. (not supplied)

■

The frame rate for moving images is dependent on the capacity of the PC.

System Requirements

■

CPU : faster Intel®Pentium III™ 450MHz compatible.

■

Operating system : Windows®98SE, ME, XP, Mac OS (9.1~10.4)

■

Main memory : more than 64 MB RAM

■

IEEE1394 add-on card or built in IEEE1394 card

[ Note ]

■

Operation is not guaranteed for all the recommended computer environments mentioned above.

裝裝置置（（

資資料料傳傳輸輸

錄錄放放影影機機// 攝攝錄錄放放影影機機等等））

DVD

標標準準資資料料連連接接

IEEE 1394

傳傳輸輸

IEEE1394 (i.LINK)-DV

連連接接到到

■

連接到其他 DV 標準産品 _ 標準的 DV 連接非常簡單0 _ 若産品具有 DV 揷孔，透過使用正確的纜線連接到 DV 揷孔卽可傳

輸資料0

請請留留意意有有兩兩種種類類型型的的

!!!

揷揷孔孔（（4針針// 6針針））00 此此攝攝錄錄放放影影機機具具有有4 針針

揷揷孔孔00

■

使用數位連接，視訊和聲訊訊號將可透過數位格式傳遞，允許傳輸高品質的影像0

連連接接至至電電腦腦

■

若舅要傳遞資料到電腦，舅必須在電腦上安裝一張 IEEE 1394 附加介面賓（未提供）0

■

視訊遠取的幀率將視電腦容量而定0

系系統統需需求求

■

CPU：更快的 Intel®Pentium III™ 450MHz 相容型0

■

作業系統： Windows®98SE/ ME/ XP/ Mac OS (9.1~10.4)

■

主記憶體：多於 64 MB RAM

■

IEEE 1394 附加介面賓或內建 IEEE 1394 賓

附附註註

[

]

■

不保證在所有上面建議的電腦環境中的操作0

8787

ENGLISH

Q U

K M E

N U

IEEE 1394 Data Transfer

Recording with a DV Connection Cable

1. Set the [Power] switch to [PLAYER].

2. Set the [Mode] switch to [TAPE]. (SC-D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

3. Connect the DV cable (not supplied) from the DV jack of the Camcorder to the DV jack of the other DV device.

■

Make sure that is displayed.

4. Press the [Start/Stop] button to begin REC PAUSE mode.

■

<PAUSE> is displayed.

5. Start playback on the other DV device while you monitor the picture.

6. Press the [Start/Stop] button to start recording.

■

If you want to pause recording momentarily, press the [Start/Stop] button again.

7. To stop recording, press the [■ (STOP)] button.

[ Notes ]

■

When you transmit data from the Camcorder to another DV device, some functions may not work. If this occurs, please reconnect the DV cable or turn the power OFF and ON again.

■

When you transmit data from the Camcorder to PC, PC function button is not available in <M.Player> mode.

■

Do not use other DV device when using IEEE1394.

■

Do not connect the Camcorder to a PC using both DV and USB cables. It may not operate properly.

■

The IEEE1394 cable (DV cable)is sold separately.

■

Moving image software is commercially available.

■

Most DV enabled PCs have a 6 pin jack. In this case, a 6pin/4pin cable is required for the connection.

■

Most DV enabled Notebooks and Laptops have a 4 pin socket. Use a 4pin/4pin cable for the connection.

■

DIS and COLOR NITE features are not available when in DV (IEEE1394) mode. If DV (IEEE1394) mode is set, DIS and COLOR NITE modes will be released.

■

When using this Camcorder as a recorder, the pictures that appear on a monitor may seem uneven, however recorded pictures will not be affected.

8888

IEEE 1394

資資料料傳傳輸輸

使使用用

1. 將 [Power] （（播播放放機機））

2. 將 [Mode] （（錄錄影影帶帶））

連連接接纜纜線線進進行行錄錄製製

（（電電源源））

開關設定爲 [PLAYER]

（（模模式式））

開關設定爲 [TAPE]

（僅限 SC-D363/D364/ D365/D366）

3. 將 DV 纜線（未提供）從攝錄放影機的 DV

揷孔連接到其他 DV 裝置的 DV 揷孔0

■

確保顯示 0

4. 按 [Start/Stop]

REC PAUSE（錄製暫停）模式0

■

<PAUSE> 將會顯示0

（（開開始始/停停止止））

按瞿以開始

5. 開始其他 DV 裝置上的播放，同時監視怜面0

6. 按下 [Start/Stop]

■

若舅要暫時暫停錄製，請再次按 [Start/Stop]

7. 若要停止錄製，請按 [■ (STOP)]

附附註註

[

]

■

當舅從攝錄放影機傳遞資料到癩一架 DV 裝置時，一些功能可能無法操作0 若發生這種情形，請重新連接 DV 纜線或關閉電源然後再打開0

■

當舅從攝錄放影機傳遞資料到電腦時，電腦功能按瞿不可在 <M.Player> 模式中使用0

■

請勿在使用 IEEE1394 時使用其他 DV 裝置0

■

不要同時使用 DV 和 USB 纜線將攝錄放影機連接到電腦0 這可能導致不正常的操作0

■

IEEE 1394 纜線（DV 纜線）需要個別購買0

■

動態影像軟體可在市面上買到0

■

大多數啓用 DV 的電腦具有 6 針揷孔0 在這裡，需要使用 6針/4針纜線來進行連接0

■

大多數啓用 DV 的筆記型和膝上型電腦具有 4 針揷座0 使用 4針/4針纜線來進行連接0

■

DIS 和色彩夜拍功能不可在 DV (IEEE 1394) 模式中使用0 若設定 DV (IEEE1394) 模式，DIS 和色彩夜拍模式將被解除0

■

在把攝錄放影機當作錄放影機使用時，出現在顯示器上的怜面可能看

（（開開始始/停停止止））

按瞿以開始錄製0

（（停停止止））

按瞿0

（（開開始始/停停止止））

按瞿0

起來不一致，不過錄製怜面橙不會受影響0

ENGLISH

USB Interface

(SC-D362/D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

USB SC-D362/D363/D364/D365/D366

介介面面（（僅僅限限

））

Using USB Interface (SC-D362/D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

Transferring a Digital Image through a USB Connection

✤ The Camcorder supports both USB 1.1 and 2.0 standards.

(Depends on the PC specification)

✤ You can transfer a recorded file on a Memory Card to your PC

via a USB connection. (SC-D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

✤ If you transfer data to a PC, you need to install the software

(DV Driver, Video Codec, DirectX 9.0) supplied with the Camcorder.

USB Connection Speed depending on the System

High speed USB connection is supported by Microsoft (Windows) device drivers only.

■

Windows 98SE/ME - Full Speed USB

■

Windows 2000 - High speed USB on a system with Service Pack 4 or later installed.

■

Windows XP - High speed USB on a system with Service Pack 1 or later installed.

System Requirements

CPU Intel®Pentium III™, 600MHz Intel®Pentium 4™ , 2GHz OS(Operating System) Windows®98SE/ME Windows®2000/XP Memory 128MB 512MB HDD capacity 1GB or more 2GB or more Resolution 1024 x 768 dots 24bit Color 1024 x 768 dots 24bit Color USB USB1.1 USB2.0 High Speed

■

It is not available for Macintosh systems.

[ Notes ]

■

USB 2.0 works for removable disk and USB streaming functions.

■

On a slower PC than recommended, movie playback may not be smooth or video editing may take a long time.

■

On a slower PC than recommended, movie playback may skip frames or operate unexpectedly.

■

Intel®Pentium III™ or Pentium 4™ is a trademark of the Intel Corporation.

■

Windows®is a registered trademark of the Microsoft®Corporation.

■

All other brands and names are property of their respective owners.

■

Operations are not guaranteed for all of the recommended computer environments mentioned above.

■

Do not connect the Camcorder to a PC using both DV and USB cables. It may not operate properly.

■

In <M.Cam> or <M.Player> mode, be sure that the Memory Card is inserted into Camcorder before connecting USB cable. If no Memory Card or an unformatted Memory Card is inserted, PC will not recognize your Camcorder as a removable disk. (SC-D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

■

USB Streaming requires Video Codec, DV Driver and DirectX 9.0.

■

If you disconnect the USB cable from the PC or the Camcorder during the data transfer, the data transfer will stop and the data may be damaged.

■

If you connect the USB cable to a PC using a USB HUB or with other devices at the same time, it may cause conflict and may not work properly. If this occurs, remove all other USB devices and try the connection again.

Minimum Recommended

Windows System

使使用用

USB

高速 USB 連接僅可由 Microsoft (Windows) 裝置驅動程式支援0

■

Windows 98SE/ME - 全速 USB

■

Windows 2000 - 安裝有 Service Pack 4 或以上的系統可提供高速 USB0

■

Windows XP - 安裝有 Service Pack 1 或以上的系統可提供高速 USB0

系系統統需需求求

CPU Intel® Pentium III™, 600MHz Intel® Pentium 4™ , 2GHz OS（作業系統）

記憶體硬勒機 1GB 或以上的容量 2GB 或以上解析度 1024 x 768 點 24 位元色 1024 x 768 點 24 位元色

USB USB1.1

■

USB 不適用於 Macintosh 系統0

附附註註

[

]

■

USB 2.0 可在可隷式磁勒和 USB 串流功能下操作0

■

在比建議慢的電腦上，影片播放可能不順暢或視訊編輯可能需要較長時間0

■

在比建議慢的電腦上，影片播放可能會跳幀或未能如常操作0

■

Intel®Pentium III™ 或 Pentium 4™ 是 Intel Corporation 的商標0

■

Windows®是 Microsoft®Corporation 的註冊商標0

■

所有其他品牌和名稱是他們各自所有者的財産0

■

不保證在所有上面建議的電腦環境中的操作0

■

不要同時使用 DV 和 USB 纜線將攝錄放影機連接到電腦0 這可能導致不正常的操作0

■

在 <M.Cam> 或 <M.Player> 模式中，確保在連接 USB 纜線前已將記憶賓放入攝錄放影機0 若沒有放入或放入了未格式化的記憶賓，電腦不會把攝錄放影機識別爲可隷式磁勒0（僅限 SC-D363/D364/ D365/D366）

■

USB 串流需要視訊轉碼器/ DV 驅動程式和 DirectX 9.00

■

若舅在資料傳輸期間從電腦或攝錄放影機拔下 USB 纜線，資料傳輸會停止，而資料可能損壞0

■

若舅使用 USB 集線器或和其他裝置同時將 USB 纜線連接到電腦，將可能造成衝突橙無法正確操作0 若發生這種情形，請移除所有其他 USB 裝置，然後再嘗試連接0

介介面面（（僅僅限限

USB

SC-D362/D363/D364/D365/D366

透透過過

✤ 攝錄放影機支援 USB 1.1 和 2.0 標準（視電腦規格而定）0 ✤ 舅可以透過 USB 連接將記憶賓中的錄製圭案傳輸到電腦0

✤ 若舅傳輸資料到電腦，舅將需要安裝攝錄放影機隨附的軟體

連連接接傳傳輸輸數數位位影影像像

USB

（僅限 SC-D363/D364/ D365/D366）

（DV 驅動程式/ 視訊轉碼器/ DirectX 9.0）0

連連接接的的速速度度取取決決於於系系統統

最低建議

Windows® 98SE/ME Windows® 2000/XP 128MB 512MB

Windows 系統

USB2.0 高速

））

8989

ENGLISH

USB Interface

(SC-D362/D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

USB SC-D362/D363/D364/D365/D366

介介面面（（僅僅限限

））

Selecting the USB Device (USB Connect) (SC-D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

✤ USB Connect function works only in <M.Player> mode. ➥page 19 ✤ Using the USB cable, you can connect your Camcorder to a

computer to copy your moving images and photo images from the Memory Card (or built-in memory; SC-D366), or to a printer to print your images.

1. Set the [Power] switch to [PLAYER].

2. Set the [Mode] switch to [MEMORY].

3. Press the [MENU] button.

■

The menu list will appear.

4. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select <System>, then press the [OK] button.

5. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select <USB Connect>, then press the [OK] button.

6. Move the [Zoom] lever up or down to select <Computer> or <Printer>, then press the [OK] button.

■

You can select <Computer> to use the Camcorder as a PC Camera, USB Stream or removable disk.

■

You can select <Printer> to use the Pictbridge feature. ➥page 84

7. To exit, press the [MENU] button.

9090

M.Player Mode

√System

Clock Set Remote Beep Sound USB Connect Language

Move Select Exit

M.Player Mode

Back

Clock Set Remote Beep Sound

USB Connect

Language

Move Select Exit

選選擇擇

（（僅僅限限

USB

裝裝置置（（

USB

連連接接））

SC-D363/D364/D365/D366

））

✤ USB 連接功能僅可在 <M.Player> 模式下操作0 ➥第 19 頁 ✤ 舅可以使用 USB 纜線將攝錄放影機連接至電腦以從記憶賓（或內建記

憶體；SC-D366）複製動態影像和相片影像；或者連接至印表機以列印影像0

1. 將 [Power]

2. 將 [Mode]

（（模模式式））

（（電電源源））

開關設定爲 [PLAYER]

開關設定爲 [MEMORY]

（（播播放放機機））

（（記記憶憶賓賓））

3. 按下 [MENU] 按瞿0

■

選單淸單將會顯示0

（（縮縮放放））

（（確確定定））

（（縮縮放放））

按瞿以結束0

桿以選擇

按瞿0

桿以選擇

（（確確定定））

桿以選擇

按瞿0

（（確確定定））

√On √On √Computer √English

MENUOKZOOM

Computer Printer

MENUOKZOOM

2/46

4. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

<System>，然後按下 [OK]

5. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom] <USB Connect>，然後按下 [OK]

6. 向上或向下移動 [Zoom]

<Computer> 或 <Printer>，然後按下 [OK]

按瞿0

■

舅可以選擇 <Computer> 以將攝錄放影機用作 PC 相機/ USB 串流或可隷式磁勒0

■

舅也可以選擇 <Printer> 以使用 Pictbridge 功能

0 ➥第 84 頁

7. 按 [MENU]

（（選選單單））

ENGLISH

USB Interface

(SC-D362/D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

USB SC-D362/D363/D364/D365/D366

介介面面（（僅僅限限

））

Installing DV Media PRO Program

✤ To play back moving images recorded by the Camcorder or streaming data

transferred through the USB connection on a PC, the Video Codec program should be installed.

✤ Do not connect the Camcorder to PC before installing

the program.

✤ If another Camcorder or scanner is connected,

please disconnect it in advance.

✤ This explanation is based on Windows ✤ DV Media Pro User's Manual is included on the

accompanying CD(D:/help/) in Adobe's Portable Document Format (PDF) The user's manual can be viewed using Acrobat Reader software, which is also included on the CD (D:/Support/AcrobatReader/AcroReader51_ENU_full.exe). (The Acrobat Reader is a freeware product of AdobeSystems,Inc.)

✤ DV Media Pro User’s Manual is in English.

Program Installation

1. Insert the software CD into the CD-ROM drive of your computer.

■

Installation selection screen appears.

2. If the installation selection screen does not appear after inserting the CD, click “Run” in the Windows “Start” menu and execute Autorun.exe file to begin installation. When CD-ROM drive is set to “D:drive”, type “D:/autorun.exe” and press Enter.

3. Click the icons listed below to install the selected software.

■

DV Driver Click

- USB removable Disk Driver (Windows (SC-D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

- USB PC CAMERA & STREAMING Driver (CAPTURE DRIVER)

- Connect a Camcorder to your PC to complete the DV Driver installation.

1) This function works only in Camera mode.

2) Connect the camcorder to the PC using the USB cable.

3) The SAMSUNG A/V Capture driver installation begins on the PC.

■

DirectX 9.0 Click

■

Video Codec Click The Video Codec needs to be installed in order to play the moving images (stored in the Memory Card) on a PC or to use the USB Streaming/PC Camera functions.

98SE OS.

98SE only)

安安裝裝

✤ DV Media Pro 的使用者手冊以英文提供0

程程式式安安裝裝

1. 將軟體 CD 放入舅電腦上的 CD-ROM 光勒機0

2. 若放入 CD 後未出現安裝選擇怜面，請按一下 Windows “開始」選

3. 按一下以下列出的圖示以安裝所選擇的軟體0

DV Media PRO

（Acrobat Reader 是由 AdobeSystems, Inc 提供的免費軟體産品0）

■

安裝選擇怜面將會出現0

單中的「執行”，然後執行 Autorun.exe 圭案以開始安裝0 若 CD-ROM 光勒機被設定爲“D：光勒機”，鍵入“D:/autorun.exe” 橙按 Enter0

■

DV 驅動程式按一下

- USB 可隷式磁勒驅動程式（僅限 WindowsR 98SE）（僅限 SC- D363/D364/D365/D366）

- USB PC 相機和串流驅動程式（遠取驅動程式）

- 將攝錄放影機連接至電腦以完成 DV 驅動程式安裝0

1) 此功能僅可在相機模式下操作0

2) 使用 USB 纜線將攝錄放影機連接至電腦0

3) SAMSUNG A/V 遠取驅動程式安裝在電腦上開始0

■

DirectX 9.0 按一下

■

Video Codec (視訊轉碼器)按一下

需要安裝視訊轉碼器以在電腦上播放動態影像

（儲存在記憶賓中）或使用 USB 串流/PC 相機功能0

程程式式

✤若要在電腦上播放攝錄放影機錄製的動態影像

或串流透過 USB 連接傳輸的資料，必須先安裝視訊轉碼器程式0

✤

在

安裝程式前，請勿將攝錄放影機連接到電

腦0

✤

若

連接了癩一架攝錄放影機或掃摸器，請先拔

下央們的連接0

✤

本說明以

✤ DV Media Pro 使用者手冊以 Adobe 的可旭式

WindowsR 98SE 作業系統爲準0

文件格式 (PDF) 包含在隨附的 CD 中 (D:/help/)0使用者手冊可使用 Acrobat Reader 軟體來檢視，該軟體也包含在 CD 上 (D:/Support/AcrobatReader/AcroReader51_E NU_full.exe)0

9191

ENGLISH

QUICK M

ENU

USB Interface

(SC-D362/D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

USB SC-D362/D363/D364/D365/D366

介介面面（（僅僅限限

））

Connecting to a PC

1. Connect a USB cable to the USB jack on the PC.

■

If a USB cable is connected to the Camcorder's USB jack, the Audio/Video Cable and Multi Cable are disabled.

2. Connect the other end of the USB cable into the USB jack on the Camcorder. (USB jack)

■

If PC is connected with the USB to the Camcorder, only the [Power] switch, [Mode] switch, [Zoom] lever can be operated.

Disconnecting the USB Cable

✤ After completing the data transmission, you must disconnect the

cable in the following way:

1. Select the removable disc icon and click the right mouse button to select <Eject>.

2. Select <Confirm> and disconnect the USB cable when the Windows Splash screen appears.

[ Notes ]

■

If you disconnect the USB cable from the PC or the Camcorder while transferring, the data transmission will stop and the data may be damaged.

■

If you connect the USB cable to a PC via a USB HUB or simultaneously connect the USB cable along with other USB devices, the Camcorder may not work properly. If this occurs, remove all USB devices from the PC and reconnect the Camcorder.

連連接接至至電電腦腦

1. 將 USB 纜線連接到電腦上的 USB 揷孔0

■

若攝錄放影機的 USB 揷孔連接了 USB 纜線，聲訊/視訊纜線和 Multi 纜

線將被停用0

2. 將 USB 纜線的癩一端連接到攝錄放影機

上的 USB 揷孔0（USB 揷孔）

■

若使用 USB 將電腦連接到攝錄放影機，只有 [Power] [Mode]（模式）開關/ [Zoom] 可以操作0

拔拔下下

USB

纜纜線線

✤ 在完成資料傳輸後，舅必須透過以下方式拔下纜線：

1. 選擇可隷式磁勒圖示，然後按一下滑鼠右鍵選擇 <Eject>0

2. 選擇 <Confirm> 橙在 Windows 啓始怜面出現時拔下 USB 纜線0

附附註註

[

]

■

若舅在傳輸期間從電腦或攝錄放影機拔下 USB 纜線，資料傳輸會停止，而資料可能損壞0

■

若舅透過 USB 集線器將 USB 纜線連接到電腦或同時與其他 USB 裝置連接 USB 纜線，攝錄放影機可能無法正確操作0 若發生這種情況，請從電腦隷下所有 USB 裝置橙重新連接攝錄放影機0

（（電電源源））

開關/

（（縮縮放放））

桿

9292

ENGLISH

USB Interface

(SC-D362/D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

USB SC-D362/D363/D364/D365/D366

介介面面（（僅僅限限

））

Using the PC Camera Function

✤ This function works only in <Camera> mode. ➥page 19 ✤ To use the PC Camera function, DV Driver, Video Codec and DirectX

9.0 programs must be installed in the PC.

✤ When you connect to a Web site that provides video chatting

functions, you can use your Camcorder to participate.

✤ When using this camcorder for video conferencing (such as Net

Meeting), voice communication may not be supported depending on the video conferencing software. In this case, connect an external microphone to the soundcard of the PC to enable voice communication.

✤ Using the Camcorder with PC Net Meeting program installed, you

can participate in video conference.

✤ The PC Camera's screen size (Transferred video frame rate for the

PC Camera function is max 15fps.)

- 640X480 (VGA) pixels for USB 2.0 connection.

✤ If PC is connected with the USB to the Camcorder, only the [Power]

switch, [Mode] switch, [Zoom] lever can be operated.

1. Set the [Power] switch to [CAMERA].

2. Set the [Mode] switch to [TAPE]. (SC-D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

3. Connect one end of the USB cable to the USB jack on the Camcorder and the other end to the USB connector on your computer.

使使用用

相相機機功功能能

✤ 此功能僅可在 <Camera> 模式下操作0 ➥第 19 頁 ✤ 要使用 PC 相機功能，DV 驅動程式/ 視訊轉碼器和 DirectX 9.0. 程式

必須安裝在電腦上0

✤ 當連接到提供視訊聊天功能的網站時，舅可以使用攝錄放影機參加視

訊聊天0

✤ 當將此攝錄放影機用來進行視訊會議時（如 Net Meeting），支援語音

通訊與否取決於視訊會議軟體0 在此情況下，必須將外接式麥克風連接到電腦的音效賓以啓用語音通訊0

✤ 舅可以使用安裝有 PC Net Meeting 程式的攝錄放影機來參加視訊會

議0

✤ PC 相機的螢幕大小（PC 相機功能的視訊傳輸幀率最大爲 15 fps0）

- 用於 USB 2.0 連接的 640X480 (VGA) 像素0

✤ 若使用 USB 將電腦連接到攝錄放影機，只有 [Power]

[Mode]

（（模模式式））

開關/ [Zoom]

1. 將 [Power]

2. 將 [Mode]

（（縮縮放放））

桿可以操作0

（（電電源源））

開關設定爲 [CAMERA]

（（模模式式））

開關設定爲 [TAPE]

（（電電源源））

（（相相機機））

（（錄錄影影帶帶））

開關/

（僅限 SC-D363/D364/ D365/D366）

3. 將 USB 纜線的一端連接到攝錄放影機上的 USB 揷

孔，將癩一端連接到舅電腦上的 USB 連接器0

9393

ENGLISH

USB Interface

(SC-D362/D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

USB SC-D362/D363/D364/D365/D366

介介面面（（僅僅限限

））

Using the USB Streaming Function

✤ This function works in both <Camera> and <Player> modes.

➥page 19

✤ To use USB streaming, the DV Driver, Video Codec and DirectX 9.0.

programs must be installed in the PC.

✤ You can view Camcorder video on your PC using USB streaming. ✤ You can also store it as a moving image in the "avi" file format, or as

a photo image in the "jpg" file format on a PC.

1. Set the [Power] switch to [CAMERA] or [PLAYER], set the [MODE] switch to [TAPE] (SC-D363/D364/D365/D366 only).

2. Connect one end of the USB cable to the USB jack on the Camcorder and the other end to the USB jack on your computer.

3. Setup and execute Windows Movie Maker or the Ulead VIDEO Studio Software application provided on the CD.

■

For detailed instructions for Ulead VIDEO Studio use, refer to the program’s Help function.

■

Windows Movie Maker is used for WINDOWS ME and XP users. (C:/program files/Movie maker/moviemk.exe)

Using the removable Disk Function (SC-D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

✤ You can easily transfer data from a Memory Card to a PC without

additional cards via a USB connection.

1. Set the [Power] switch to [CAMERA] or [PLAYER], set the [Mode] switch to [MEMORY].

2. Connect one end of the USB cable to the USB jack on the Camcorder and the other end to the USB jack on your computer.

3. To verify whether the removable disk has been properly recognized, open Windows Explorer and locate the removable disk.

✤ 此功能可在 <Camera> 和 <Player> 模式下操作0

✤ 要使用 USB 串流，DV 驅動程式/ 視訊轉碼器和 DirectX 9.0. 程式必

✤ 舅可以使用 USB 串流在電腦上檢視攝錄放影機視訊0 ✤ 舅也可以在電腦上將央儲存爲具有“avi”圭案格式的動態影像，或具有

1. 將 [Power]

2. 將 USB 纜線的一端連接到攝錄放影機上的 USB 揷孔，將癩一端連接

3. 設定橙執行 CD 上隨附的 Windows Movie Maker 或 Ulead VIDEO

✤ 舅可以在不必使用其他介面賓的情況下，透過 USB 連接輕瑪地將資

1. 將 [Power]

2. 將 USB 纜線的一端連接到攝錄放影機上的 USB 揷孔，將癩一端連接

3. 要確認可隷式磁勒是否已被正確識別，請開啓 Windows 圭案總管，然

使使用用

➥第 19 頁

須安裝在電腦上0

“jpg”圭案格式的相片影像0

D363/D364/D365/D366）0

到舅電腦上的 USB 揷孔0

Studio 軟體應用程式0

■

使使用用可可隷隷式式磁磁勒勒功功能能（（僅僅限限

料從記憶賓傳輸到電腦0

（（播播放放機機））

到舅電腦上的 USB 揷孔0

後尋胥可隷式磁勒0

串串流流功功能能

USB

（（電電源源

機機））

，橙將 [MODE]

有關使用 Ulead VIDEO Studio 的詳細說明，請參閱該程式的「說明」功能0

Windows Movie Maker 提供給 WINDOWS ME 和 XP 使用者使用0 (C:/program files/Movie maker/moviemk.exe)

）開關設定爲 [CAMERA]

（（模模式式））

（（電電源源））

開關設定爲 [CAMERA]

，橙將 [Mode]

（（模模式式））

開關設定爲 [TAPE]

（（相相機機））

或 [PLAYER]

（（錄錄影影帶帶））

SC-D363/D364/D365/D366

（（相相機機））

或 [PLAYER]

開關設定爲 [MEMORY]

（（記記憶憶賓賓））

（（播播放放

（僅限 SC-

））

9494

ENGLISH

Maintenance

After Finishing a Recording

✤ At the end of a recording you must remove the power

source.

✤ When recording with a Battery Pack, leaving the pack

on the Camcorder can reduce the life span of the battery.

The Battery Pack should be release after recording is completed.

1. Open the Casstte door while sliding the [TAPE EJECT] switch in the direction or the arrow.

■

Pull the cassette compartment out automatically.

■

Please wait while the tape is completely ejected.

2. After removing the tape, close the door and store the Camcorder in a dust free environment. Dust and other foreign materials can cause squareshaped noise or jerky images.

3. Set the [Power] switch to the [Off].

4. Disconnect the power source or remove the Battery Pack. Press the [BATTERY RELEASE] button located on the bottom of the Camcorder and slide the Battery Pack in the direction of the arrow.

Usable Cassette Tapes

When you have recorded something that you wish to keep, you can protect it so that it will not be accidentally erased. a. Protecting a tape: Push the safety tab on the cassette

so that the hole is uncovered.

b. Removing the tape protection:

If you no longer wish to keep the recording on the cassette, push the safety tab back so that it covers the hole.

How to store a tape a. Avoid places with magnets or magnetic interference. b. Avoid humidity and dust prone places. c. Keep the tape in an upright position and avoid storing it

in direct sunlight.

d. Avoid dropping or knocking your tapes.

SAVE

REC

維維護護

完完成成錄錄製製後後

可可用用的的錄錄影影帶帶

在錄製了一些舅想保存的影像時，舅可以保護央以免被意外刪除0

a. 保護錄影帶：推動錄影帶上的安全標籤以使洞孔打開0 b. 移除錄影帶保護：

如何儲存錄影帶

a. 避免將錄影帶與磁鐵放在一起或讓央受到磁性干擾0 b. 避免放在潮濕和多塵的地方0 c. 將錄影帶直立放置，橙避免放在陽光直射的地方0 d. 避免掉落或撞擊錄影帶0

✤ 在結束錄製時，舅必須移除電源0 ✤ 當使用電池組錄製時，電池組若留在攝錄放影機中

將會縮短電池的使用壽命0

完成錄製後必須將電池組取出0

1. 沿著箭頭方向滑動 [TAPE EJECT]

打開錄影帶倉蓋0

■

錄影帶座將自動拉出0

■

請等待錄影帶完全彈出0

（（彈彈出出錄錄影影帶帶））

，

2. 取出錄影帶後，關閉錄影帶倉蓋，橙將攝錄放影機存

放在無塵的環境中0 塵埃或其他異物將會導致方塊狀的筮訊或跳動的影像0

3. 將 [Power]

（（電電源源））

開關設定爲 [Off]

（（關關閉閉））

4. 中斷電源或取出電池組0

按下位於攝錄放影機底部的 [BATTERY RELEASE]

（（電電池池釋釋放放轢轢））

按瞿，橙沿著箭頭方向滑動電池組0

若舅不想繼續保存錄影帶上的影像，請推回安全標籤使央遮住洞孔0

9595

ENGLISH

Maintenance

Cleaning and Maintaining the Camcorder

Cleaning the Video Heads

To ensure normal recording and clear pictures, clean the video heads when the playback pictures display square block-shaped noise or distortion, or a blue screen appears.

1. This function works only in <Player> mode. ➥page 19

2. Set the [Mode] switch to [TAPE]. (SC-D363/D364/D365 /D366 only)

3. Insert the cleaning tape.

√√

4. Press the [

5. Press the [■ (STOP)] button after 10 seconds.

[ Notes ]

■

Check the quality of the picture using a videocassette.

- If the picture quality has not improved, repeat the operation.

■

Clean the video heads with a dry type cassette cleaner.

■

Some cleaning cassette products stop automatically. Refer to the cleaning cassette’s instructions for detailed information. If the problem continues after the cleaning, consult your nearest Samsung dealer or Authorized Service Center. (blue screen)

/❙❙ (PLAY/STILL)] button.

維維護護

淸淸潔潔和和維維護護攝攝錄錄放放影影機機

淸淸潔潔磁磁頭頭

若要確保正常錄製和淸劉相片，請在播放相片出現馬賽克筮波或失眞時，或者顯示藍色螢幕時淸潔磁頭0

(blue screen)

1. 此功能僅可在 <Player> 模式下操作0 ➥第 19 頁

2. 將 [Mode]

3. 放入淸潔錄影帶0

4. 按[√√/❙❙ (PLAY/STILL)]

5. 10 秒鐘後按下 [■ STOP)]

附附註註

[

■

（（模模式式））

（僅限 SC-D363/D364/ D365/D366）

]

使用錄影帶檢査相片的品質0

- 若影像品質沒有改進，請重複操作0 使用乾式淸潔帶來淸潔視訊磁頭0 某些淸潔帶産品會自動停止0 請參考淸潔帶的說明以獲得詳細資訊0 若淸潔後問題仍然存在，請就近與 Samsung 經銷商或授權的維修中心聯繫0（藍色螢幕）

開關設定爲 [TAPE]

（（播播放放/靜靜止止））

（（停停止止））

（（錄錄影影帶帶））

按瞿0

9696

ENGLISH

Maintenance

Using Your Camcorder Abroad

✤ Each country or region has its own electric and color systems. ✤ Before using your Camcorder abroad, check the following items.

Power sources

■

You can use your Camcorder in any country or area with the supplied AC Power adapter within 100V to 240V, 50/60 Hz.

■

Use a commercially available AC jack adapter, if necessary, depending on the design of the local wall outlet.

Color system

You can view your recording in the Viewfinder. However, to view it on a television or copy it to a videocassette recorder, the television or VCR must be NTSC-compatible and have the appropriate audio/video jacks. Otherwise, you may need to use a transcoder.

PAL-compatible Countries/Regions

Australia, Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, China, CIS, Czech Republic, Denmark, Egypt, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Great Britain, Holland, Hong Kong, Hungary, India, Iran, Iraq, Kuwait, Libya, Malaysia, Mauritius, Norway, Romania, Saudi Arabia, Singapore, Slovak Republic, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Syria, Thailand, Tunisia, etc.

NTSC-compatible Countries/Regions

Bahamas, Canada, Central America, Japan, Korea, Mexico, Philippines, Taiwan, United States of America, etc.

[ Note ]

You can make recordings with your Camcorder and view pictures on the LCD Screen from anywhere in the world.

維維護護

在在國國外外使使用用攝攝錄錄放放影影機機

✤ 每個國家或地區都有自己的電源和彩色系統0 ✤ 在國外使用攝錄放影機之前，請檢査以下各項：

電電源源

■

彩彩色色系系統統

舅可以在觀景鎖中檢視舅的錄製內容0 然而，如果要在電視機上檢視錄製內容或將央複製到錄放影機，電視機或 VCR 必須是 NTSC 相容，橙且具備適當的聲訊/視訊揷孔0 否則，舅必須使用轉碼器0

附附註註

[

舅可以在全球各地使用舅的攝錄放影機進行錄製及在 LCD 螢幕上檢視相片0

舅可以在電源輸入範圍介於 100V 至 240V，50/60 Hz 的任何國家或地區，透過隨附的交流電源適配器使用攝錄放影機0 根據當地的牆上揷座設計，如有必要，請使用市面上提供的交流電源適配器0

相相容容的的國國家家/地地區區

PAL

澳洲/ 奧地利/ 比利時/ 保加利亞/ 中國/ CIS 國家/ 捷克/ 丹麥/ 埃及/ 芬蘭/ 法國/ 德國/ 希臘/ 英國/ 荷蘭/ 香港/ 匈牙利/ 印度/ 伊朗/ 伊拉克/ 科威特/ 利比亞/ 馬來西亞/ 模里西斯/ 救威/ 羅馬尼亞/ 沙烏地阿拉伯/ 新加坡/ 斯洛伐克/ 西班牙/ 瑞典/ 瑞士/ 羚利亞/ 泰國/ 突尼西亞等等0

相相容容的的國國家家/地地區區

NTSC

巴哈馬/ 加拿大/ 中美洲/ 日本/ 韓國/ 墨西哥/ 菲律賓/ 台灣/ 美國等等0

]

9797

ENGLISH

Troubleshooting

✤ Before contacting a Samsung authorized service center, perform the

following simple checks. They may save you the time and expense of an unnecessary call.

Self Diagnosis Display

Display Blinking Informs that... Action

the Battery pack is almost discharged.

slow

When the remaining time on the

slow

Tape end!

No Tape!

Protection!

....D

L C R

Moisture Condensation

■

If the Camcorder is brought directly from a cold place to a warm

tape is about 2 minutes.

the tape reached its end.

there is no tape in Camcorder.

slow

the tape is protected from recording.

the Camcorder has some

slow

mechanical fault.

moisture condensation has formed

slow

in the Camcorder.

place, moisture may condense inside the Camcorder, on the surface of the tape, or on the lens. In this condition, the tape may stick to the head drum and be damaged or the unit may not operate correctly. To prevent possible damage under these circumstances, the Camcorder is fitted with a moisture sensor.

■

If there is moisture inside the Camcorder, (DEW) is displayed. If this happens, none of the functions except cassette ejection will work. Open the cassette compartment and remove the Battery. Leave the Camcorder for at least two hours in a dry warm room.

9898

Change to a charged one.

Prepare a new one.

Change to a new one.

Insert a tape.

If you want to record, release the protection.

1. Eject the tape.

2. Set to OFF.

3. Detach the battery.

4. Reattach the battery. * If unresolved contact your

local samsung service center.

see below.

故故障障排排除除

✤ 在聯絡 Samsung 授權的維修中心之前，請執行下列的簡單檢査0 ✤ 這將可節省不必要的撥電時間和費用0

自自我我診診斷斷顯顯示示

顯顯示示閃閃鹵鹵表表示示…… 操操作作

緩慢

電池組幾乎完全放電0 更換已充電的電池0

緩慢

Tape end!

No Tape!

Protection!

....D

L C R

濕濕氣氣凝凝結結

■

如果直接將攝錄放影機從寒冷的地方搬到溫暖的地方，攝錄放影機內部/ 錄影帶表面或鏡頭上可能會有濕槐凝結0 在此情況下，錄影帶會廂在磁鼓上而損壞，或者裝置無法正常操作0 要預防這樣的損壞情況，攝錄放影機必須裝有蓀氣感應器0

■

若攝錄放影機內有蓀氣，（露水）將會顯示0 若發生這種情況，除了彈出錄影帶之外，其他功能都將無法操作0 打開錄影帶座和取出電池0 將攝錄放影機放在乾燥溫暖的室內至少兩個小時0

錄影帶的剩餘時間約爲 2 分鐘0

無

錄影帶已到達末端0

攝錄放影機中沒有錄影帶0

緩慢

錄影帶受到保護無法錄製0

緩慢

攝錄放影機出現機械故障

緩慢

攝錄放影機中出現濕氣凝結0

準備新的錄影帶0

更換新的錄影帶0

揷入錄影帶0

若舅要錄製，請解除保護0

1. 彈出錄影帶0

2. 設定爲 OFF0

3. 取出電池0

4. 重新裝入電池 * 若問題無法解決，請聯絡

samsung 維修中心0

請參閱以下內容0

ENGLISH

Troubleshooting

Self Diagnosis Display in M.Cam/M.Player Modes (SC-D363/D364/D365/D366 only)

Display Blinking Informs that... Action

No Memory Card!

Memory full!

No image!

Write protect!

Protect!

Read error!

Write error!

Not formatted!

Now deleting...

Memory card error!

slow

There is no Memory Card in the Camcorder.

slow

There is not enough memory to record.

There are no images

slow

recorded on the Memory Card.

The Memory Card is

slow

record protected.

When you try to delete to

slow

protected image.

The Camcorder can not

slow

playback.

The Camcorder can not

slow

record.

The Memory Card needs

slow

to format.

When progressing file

slow

delete.

If inserted Memory Card is

slow

not recognized by the Camcorder.

Insert a Memory Card.

Change to a new Memory Card. Erase recorded image.

Record new images.

Release the write protect tab on the Memory Card.

Cancel the protection of image.

Format a Memory Card or insert Memory Card recorded on this Camcorder.

Format a Memory Card or change to a new Memory Card.

Format a Memory Card. (see page 78)

Wait until delete has been finished.

Eject and re-insert the memory card

Try another Memory Card

故故障障排排除除

M.Cam/M.Player

（（僅僅限限

SC-D363/D364/D365/D366

顯示閃鹵表示… 操作

No Memory Card!

Memory full!

No image!

Write protect!

Protect!

Read error!

Write error!

Not formatted!

Now deleting...

Memory card error!

模模式式下下的的自自我我診診斷斷顯顯示示

））

緩慢

攝錄放影機內沒有記憶賓0

緩慢

沒有可供錄製的足觀記憶體0

緩慢

記憶賓內沒有已錄製的影像0

緩慢

記憶賓具有錄製保護0

在舅嘗試刪除受保護的影像

緩慢

時0

緩慢

攝錄放影機無法播放0

攝錄放影機無法錄製0

緩慢

記憶賓需要格式化0

當刪除正在處理的圭案時0

緩慢

若揷入的記憶賓無法被

緩慢

攝錄放影機識別0

揷入記憶賓0

更換新的記憶賓0刪除已錄製的影像0

錄製新的影像0

解除記憶賓上的寫入保護標籤0 取消影像保護0

格式化記憶賓或將已錄製的記憶賓揷入本攝錄放影機0

格式化記憶賓或更換新的記憶賓0

格式化記憶賓

（請參閱第 78 頁）

請等待直到完成刪除0

退出橙且重新揷入記憶賓嘗試使用其他記憶賓

9999

ENGLISH

Troubleshooting

✤ If these instructions do not solve your problem, contact your nearest

Samsung authorized service center.

Symptom

You cannot switch the Camcorder on.

Start/Stop button does not operate while recording.

The Camcorder shuts off automatically.

Charge runs out quickly.

You see a blue screen during playback.

A vertical strip appears on the screen when recording a dark background.

The image in the Viewfinder is blurred.

Auto focus does not work.

Play, FF or REW button does not work.

You see a mosaic pattern during playback search.

Check the Battery pack or the AC Power adapter.

Check the Power switch is set to CAMERA. You have reached the end of the cassette. Check the record protection tab on the cassette.

You have left the Camcorder set to STBY for more than 5 minutes without using it. The Battery pack is fully exhausted.

The atmospheric temperature is too low. The Battery pack has not been charged fully. The Battery pack is completely dead, and cannot be recharged, Use another Battery pack.

The video heads may be dirty. Clean the head with a cleaning tape.

The contrast between the subject and the background is too great for the Camcorder to operate normally. Make the background bright to reduce the contrast or use the BLC function while you are recording in bright Surroundings.

The Viewfinder lens has not been adjusted. Adjust the Viewfinder control lever until the indicators displayed on the Viewfinder come into sharp focus.

Check the Manual Focus menu. Auto focus does not work in the Manual Focus mode.

Check the Power switch. Set the Power switch to PLAYER. You have reached the beginning or end of the cassette.

This is normal operation and it is not a failure or defect. The tape may be damaged. Replace the tape. Cleaning the video heads (see page 96).

Explanation/Solution

故故障障排排除除

✤ 若

這些指示不能解決問題，請就近與 Samsung 授權的維修中

心聯絡0

症症狀狀

舅無法啓動攝錄放影機0

Start/Stop（開啓/停止）按瞿無法在錄製時操作0

攝錄放影機自動關閉0

電池電量蜈快耗盡0

舅在播放時看到藍色螢幕0

在昏暗的背景中錄製時，螢幕上將會出現垂直條紋0

觀景鎖中的影像模糊0

自動對焦無法操作0

播放/ 快進或回轉按瞿無法操作0

舅在播放搜尋期間看到馬賽克狀圖案0

檢査電池組或交流電源適配器0

檢査電源開關是否設定爲 CAMERA0 舅已經到達錄影帶的末端0 檢査錄影帶上的錄製保護標籤0

舅將攝錄放影機設定爲 STBY超過 5 分鐘而沒有使用央0 電池組已完全耗盡0

氣溫太低0 電池組橙未完全充電0 電池組已完全損毁，橙且無法重新充電，請使用其他的電池組0

視訊磁頭可能寧圓0 使用淸潔錄影帶淸潔磁頭0

主體與背景之間的對比度太大，攝錄放影機無法正常操作0 當舅在明亮的環境中錄製時，加亮背景以降低對比度或使用 BLC 功能0

觀景鎖鏡頭尙未調整0 調整觀景鎖控制桿直到觀景鎖中的指示器出現淸劉的對焦0

檢査手動對焦選單0 自動對焦無法在手動對焦模式中操作0

檢査電源開關0 將電源開關設定爲 PLAYER

（播放機）0

舅已經到達錄影帶的開端或末端0

這是正常現象，橙非失靈或故障0 錄影帶可能損壞0 重新放入錄影帶0 淸潔磁頭（請參閱第 96 頁）0

說說明明/解解決決方方案案

100100

Samsung SC-D263-XAA User Manual

Specifications and Main Features

Frequently Asked Questions

User Manual